JP6613491B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result.

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, there is known a gaming machine that performs a general electric release effect on a full screen (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-215233 A

  However, there is a possibility that the display of the stop of the decorative symbol cannot be recognized and the gaming interest is lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high probability state, etc.). There performs variable display of the identification information (e.g., a special symbol, decorative images, etc.), a gaming machine to derive the displayed results by stopping displaying the identification information, determines whether to control the advantageous state determination Means (for example, processing for determining the special symbol display result in the special symbol normal processing (step S240), processing for determining the jackpot type (step S244), etc.), and controlling to the advantageous state before the determination by the determining device Determining means (for example, a process for determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination in the winning random number determination process (step S406), or determining the jackpot type. Processing (step S407) and the like), and character information display means for displaying the character information associated with the variable display, effect image (e.g., 26, 27, 58, various effect images shown in FIG. 62 or the like and a presentation execution means for executing an effect with etc.), the presentation execution section, a prediction effect is executed based on determination of the determining means, first effect image to the first layer (e.g., step A first notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect or the like) can be executed, and the notice effect executed based on the determination by the determination means is provided in front of the first layer. A second notice effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) for displaying a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) on the second layer arranged on the side can be executed. When executing the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first effect image is displayed on the first layer, and the second effect image is displayed on the second layer. The second effect image is displayed on the front side of the image, and during the variable display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on a layer arranged on the back side of the first layer, and during the stop display of the identification information, The identification information is displayed on a layer disposed on the front side of the second layer, and the effect execution means can further display the identification information during variable display and during the stop display of the identification information. In a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 40 or a predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 52) using a predetermined effect image (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 26C). Predetermined performance to be performed) Executable der is, displayed in a predetermined time period of the variable display in the identification information even without low, the identification information to the predetermined effect image than the layer that displays arranged on the rear side layer (e.g., FIG. 31 ( As shown in A), during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative symbol), and at least the specific effect image is displayed in a specific period during the stop display of the identification information. The identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the front side of the layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 31B, when the decorative design is stopped (for 2 seconds after the stop display), a predetermined effect image is displayed. that displays in the lower layers than the pattern). Further, the character information display means displays character information corresponding to the effect being executed during variable display, and displays the content of the character information so that the content of the character information can be specified even when the second effect image is displayed, The display time of the character information may be varied according to the type of effect corresponding to the character information.
The gaming machine described above is a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols, etc.), and displays the identification information in a stopped manner to derive a display result, and character information related to variable display includes a character information display means for displaying, effect image (e.g., 26, 27, 58, various effect images shown in FIG. 62, etc.), and effect execution means for executing an effect with, The effect executing means displays an interlocking image (for example, an effect effect effect image or the like) on the first layer in conjunction with the operation of the movable body (movable accessory 17 or the like). Etc.), and the non-interlocking image (for example, group notice effect image etc.) is not displayed on the second layer arranged behind the first layer without being interlocked with the operation of the movable body. Linked production can be executed When executing a linked effect and the unlinked effect, the linked image is displayed on the first layer and the unlinked image is displayed on the second layer, so that the unlinked image is displayed on the back side of the linked image. An image is displayed, identification information is displayed on a layer arranged on the back side of the second layer during variable display of the identification information, and on the front side of the first layer during stop display of the identification information. The identification information is displayed on the arranged layer, and the effect execution means further includes a predetermined effect image (for example, FIG. 26 (FIG. 26 ()) that can be displayed across the variable display of the identification information and the stop display of the identification information. C) a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 40 or a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 52) is executed. possible der Ri In the predetermined period of the variable display in the identification information even without less than said predetermined effect image display layers to display the identification information to the layer arranged on the back side (e.g., as shown in FIG. 31 (A), During the variable display of the decorative design, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative design), and at least in a specific period during the stop display of the identification information, it is arranged in front of the layer displaying the predetermined effect image The identification information is displayed on the displayed layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B)), while the decorative design is stopped (for 2 seconds after the stop display), the predetermined effect image is displayed on a layer lower than the decorative design. that displays). The character information display means displays character information corresponding to an effect being executed during variable display, and displays the content of the character information so that the content of the character information can be specified even when the interlocking image is displayed. The display time of the character information may be varied in accordance with the type of effect corresponding to.
In addition, the gaming machine according to another aspect displays an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high probability state, etc.) advantageous for the player by variably displaying identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols, etc.). A game machine that is controllable and includes an effect execution means for executing an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 26, 27, 58, 62, etc.), The effect execution means is a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the like) is controlled to a state where the game medium is easy to win (for example, an expanded open state). , A predetermined effect (for example, the predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 40 or the predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 52). Etc.) The predetermined effect image is set to have a higher image display priority than the identification information at least during a predetermined period during variable display of the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. During the variable display of the symbol, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a layer higher than the decorative symbol), and the priority of the image display is set lower than the identification information at least during a specific period during the stop display of the identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), during the stop display of the decorative symbol (for 2 seconds after the stop display), the predetermined effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the decorative symbol).

  According to the above configuration, the stop display of the identification information can be recognized.

(2) Also, the gaming machine described in (1) above has a game control means (for example, control by the CPU 103 of the main board 11) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect) for executing the effect. Control by the CPU 120 for effect control of the control board 12), and the effect control means is a variable display means for performing variable display of identification information at least with the effect execution means (for example, a variation pattern in variable display start setting processing). Including a process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the use pattern (step S532) and a process of variably displaying decorative symbols based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542). The game control means instructs the effect control means to stop display of identification information (for example, FIG. Based on the fact that the production control means has received the stop command, the variable display means stops displaying the identification information being variably displayed (for example, in the waiting process per special figure). The symbol is stopped and displayed (step S724), etc., and the priority order of the image display of the predetermined effect image and the priority order of the identification information are switched based on the fact that the effect control means receives the stop command (for example, As shown in step S722, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display is set to a Z value (Z value = 11) larger than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image, and as shown in step S724, the symbol is displayed. When the confirmation designation command is received, the Z value of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed is switched to a Z value (Z value = 1) smaller than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image).

  According to the above configuration, the stop display of the identification information can be recognized.

(3) Also, in the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the predetermined effect image has a special period (for example, 2 seconds after the stop display) after the identification information being variably displayed is stopped. In the period after the elapse of time, the priority order is set lower than the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. After that, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the decorative pattern).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(4) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, a determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a special symbol display result in the special symbol normal processing) (Step S240), jackpot type determination processing (step S242), etc.) and determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means (for example, In the winning random number determination process, a process for determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination (step S406), a process for determining the jackpot type (step S407), and the like, The first notice effect (step, for example, step-up notice effect image or group notice effect image) is used as the notice effect executed based on the determination by the determining means. And a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) is used as a notice effect executed based on the determination of the determination means. A second notice effect (for example, a chance zone effect) can be executed, and different priorities are set for the first effect image and the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 25A). The Z value “8” is set for the group notice effect image, the Z value “9” is set for the chance zone effect image, and the Z value “10” is set for the step-up notice effect image).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(5) Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the effect executing means is displayed in conjunction with the operation of a movable body (for example, movable accessory 17). A linked effect (for example, an effect effect effect or the like) using a linked image (for example, an effect effect image or the like) and a non-linked image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) that is displayed without being linked to the operation of the movable body. ) Using a non-interlocking effect (for example, a group notice effect) can be executed, and the interlocking image is set to have a higher priority of image display than the non-interlocking image (for example, FIGS. 28 and 29). As shown, the effect effect effect image having the Z value “6” is displayed on the front side of the group notice effect image having the Z value “8”).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(6) In addition, the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) described above is a storage unit that stores variable display that has not started yet as storage information (for example, first special figure storage) 151A, second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second starting winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), and a hold corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means Hold display means for displaying an image (for example, a display image such as a hold) (for example, a process for adding a hold display in the winning effect determination process (steps S162 and S165) or a variable display start setting process) Processing (step S531) and the like, and the effect execution means is a continuous moving image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body (for example, the movable accessory 17). A linked effect (for example, an effect effect effect image or the like) can be executed, and the linked image has a higher priority for image display than the reserved image (for example, as shown in FIG. 28). In addition, the effect effect effect image with the Z value “6” is displayed on the front side of the display image such as the hold of the Z value “7”).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

(7) In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6), the effect executing unit may be configured to display a first area (an area having an image size “small” as illustrated in FIG. 25A). ) Using a first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image) and a second region (for example, as shown in FIG. 25A) wider than the first region. A second effect (for example, a group notice effect, a step-up notice effect image, etc.) using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image, a step-up notice effect image, etc.) can be executed in the size “large” region. Different priority orders are set for the first effect image and the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), a Z value “8” is set for the group notice effect image, Z value “9” for chance zone effect image Is set, it is set Z value "10" is to step up announcement attraction image).

  According to the said structure, an effect image can be displayed suitably.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sensor error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a normal symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the various images displayed on the image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is the conceptual diagram which represented the layer of various images typically. It is the conceptual diagram which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining production determination processing, such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining production patterns etc., such as holding. It is explanatory drawing explaining a chance zone effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined production process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio, such as the presence or absence of execution of a predetermined effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio etc. of the execution presence or absence of the main notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance zone effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example, such as group notice effect operation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect execution alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of a predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd predetermined production process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the Z value etc. of another image. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a figure which shows an example of the Z value etc. of another image. It is the conceptual diagram etc. which represented the layer of various images typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. As described above, the second start winning port as the second start area includes an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normal open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enters) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning opening (first starting winning prize opening or second starting winning prize opening) is referred to as “starting winning prize”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning prize is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (described later). ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display is established.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), it is executed in the second special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display of decorative symbols is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the fact that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start prize for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbols is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated. If the second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, that the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed, When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  The reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. In the case where the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. That is, when simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”, one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number Or it may refer to three. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol” or “special symbol 1”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Special figure) is also referred to as “second special figure” or “special figure 2”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one. In addition, as described above, the expression “first hold display” is an operation based on the first special figure hold information (lighting control of the LED of the first hold indicator 25A and the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later). In addition to indicating display control), the display itself based on the first special figure hold information (display by the LED of the first hold indicator 25A, display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later)) There is also. For example, the first hold display when the first hold display is newly added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (described later) indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to “second hold display” and “active display” (described later).

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  Note that when there is no particular distinction between the first hold display and the second hold display, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified, are variably displayed. The variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. A decorative symbol display corresponding to the start of a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game), that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special figure (first special figure or second special figure) In each of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a change in decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as the left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is also referred to as the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as the right symbol.

  The decorative design is composed of, for example, 8 types of designs (alphanumeric characters, Chinese numerals, English characters, figures, character images related to a predetermined motif, etc.). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be assigned to the decorative symbols of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and any number may be used (for example, seven or nine).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, there is a case where temporary stop display is performed in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started until the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined effect (for example, a slip effect (described later), a pseudo-continuous effect (described later), a re-lottery effect (described later), etc.) is performed, a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is performed. In addition, the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be performed as a part of the predetermined performance, or the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be performed with the execution of the predetermined performance. In other words, the temporary stop display of the decorative design may be regarded as a part of the predetermined effect, or may be regarded as a different thing from the predetermined effect. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side).

  Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a digestion display area, etc.) AHA is arranged. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a digestion display, a current display, etc.) is displayed based on the fact that the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold display displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA to display the active display, and the second start When the condition is satisfied, the second hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. The display mode of the hold display immediately before moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA and the display mode of the active display immediately after moving (shifting) to the active display area AHA may be different. That is, the display mode may change when shifting to the active display. Hereinafter, an active display that is displayed based on the fact that a certain hold display M is deleted may be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M. That is, “corresponding” in the “active display corresponding to the hold display” means that the active display takes over at least a part of the hold display when the variable display such as a decorative design is started by the disappearance of the hold display. Or a display similar to the hold display (for example, when the same character is drawn).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR as shown in FIG. The active display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the left and right oblique upper parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (line, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by a push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice for requesting an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice or voice for notifying that the state shifts to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. , Sounds, voices, etc. that give notice or suggestion that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the upper position of the image display device 5 is changed from the first position (initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (lower end position, for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5). A movable accessory 17 is provided that can move up to a distance.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is placed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effects devices that perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may have other effects such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower. An apparatus may be provided.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), for example, a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per ordinary symbol (per ordinary symbol)”. " On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, the variable symbol display result of “normal symbol losing (normal Design loss). Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state is an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”. Is executed (number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to change the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, changes the grand prize opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the grand prize opening in the open state, and then closes the grand prize opening door. The grand opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed.

  In addition, it is not an aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round and the grand prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, but the grand prize opening door is closed at the start of the round without immediately opening the grand prize opening door. It is good also as an aspect which opens and closes a big winning opening door and changes a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state after that. Also, it is not an aspect that closes the grand prize opening door at the end of the round and changes the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state, but closes the prize opening door and changes the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state. It is good also as an aspect which is maintained to and finishes a round after that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot gaming state until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the round even if the number of executions of the round has not reached the predetermined maximum number of times, because the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won the big prize opening). May be terminated.

  Note that the predetermined upper limit number of times may be one type (for example, always 10 times) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined maximum number of times may be any number selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, and 16 times).

  In the round, the condition of whether the predetermined winning opening time has elapsed after opening the large winning opening door or whether a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winnings to the large winning opening occurs or not is determined. It is kept open until established. The predetermined upper limit opening time may be one type (for example, always 29 seconds) or a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined upper limit opening time may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds).

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) may be one type (for example, always 3 seconds) or may be a plurality of types. For example, the predetermined time (closing period) may be any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of time (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds).

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively long (for example, a round whose opening state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal opening round, and a round whose upper limit opening time is relatively short (for example, opening) A round whose state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  In addition, among special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, a round that is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normal open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normal open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the upper limit opening time has not elapsed after opening the grand prize opening door, if a predetermined number of winnings are made to the big prize opening, the grand prize opening will change from the open state to the closed state. The value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state, The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state by changing the length of the period (for example, the number of short times and ST times) in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state is maintained May be different.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative display variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation of the lamp 9 (extinguishing, blinking, lighting, etc.), and the operation of the movable accessory 17 (stationary, It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode before entering the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which one of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot for a certain performance is, for example, (probability that the performance will be executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability of that performance being executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of becoming a big hit) + (Probability that the effect will be executed at times other than the jackpot) × (Probability that the jackpot will not be hit)}. In addition, when a certain effect is executed and “big hit” is always obtained, the big hit expectation degree of the effect is “1”. The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach by a certain production.

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. The sliding effect is an effect in which a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped is displayed again in a special game. Or, it is an effect in which a part of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again. According to the slip effect, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed can be changed to another symbol, so that, for example, it can be shown that the non-reach state is changed to the reach state.

  Pseudo-continuous effect is a variable display of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and then temporarily displayed in some or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in one special game. It is a production to make. The re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect can be performed a plurality of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times) for one special figure game.

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). In addition, the number of re-variable displays in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as pseudo-continuous number (or pseudo-continuous fluctuation number). That is, the number of pseudo continuous operations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. Note that the increase in the number of times of the pseudo ream, such as the first time, the second time, the third time,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo ream continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In this embodiment, an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  The pseudo-continuous effect may be performed before the reach is established, or may be performed after the reach is established. That is, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the temporary stop display may be performed before the reach state is reached, or the temporary stop display may be performed after the reach state is reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed or that the expectation level of the big hit is high. Also good. In the following, there is a case in which any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is likely to be executed or the effect that predicts or suggests to the player that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is collectively referred to as the notice effect.

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time that the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be based on sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 17, and the like.

  Note that the notification (notification or suggestion) by the notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notice content is realized. For example, the notice effect that notifies the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state) is entered. In addition, the notice effect that notifies the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” may be performed before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is displayed. Also referred to as target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  In addition, as the pre-reading notice effect, a hold effect may be prepared according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize win memory display area 5HR. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays the character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. Note that when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning a prize) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round controlled when the 8R probability variation big hit is reached or the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. In other words, in the present embodiment, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are normal open round jackpot symbols.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the 8R probability variation is a big hit, but the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise ”)” in which a short-term open round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol (also referred to as a random symbol). In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern with an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three rows (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the reach state is reached. After the reach effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and the predetermined reach is reached. After the performance is executed or the like, or without reaching the reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) Or a combination including a predetermined decorative design (for example, a combination of “1”, “probability”, “2”, etc.).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which 16 rounds are executed. ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probability variation control is performed when a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

  In addition, by performing the time reduction control, the variable symbol variable display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to when the time reduction control is not performed. Time-shortening control is when a special game is executed a predetermined number of times shortly after the end of the big hit gaming state or when the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is performed, the time-shortening control ends when the special time-limited number of special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (ordinary time change time) in the normal game to be shorter than that in the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per symbol”, the control for improving the probability that the variable display result is “per symbol”, compared to the case where the time control is not performed. The game ball receives the second starting prize, such as a control that makes the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece longer than when the time-short control is not performed, and a control that increases the number of tilts compared to when the time-short control is not performed. Control that is advantageous for the player is performed by facilitating passage (entrance) through the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability variation state. The short time state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability variation state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A gaming state in which time-shortened control or high-opening control is performed together with probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is both highly accurate state (probability variation state) and high base state (time-short state) is a highly accurate high base state or a time variation probability variation state. Also called. A gaming state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short-time control or the high opening control is not performed, that is, the gaming state that is in the high-probability state (probability variation state) but not in the high base state (time-short state) is the high probability low base state. Or it is also called a short-term uncertain change state. Note that only the high-accuracy high-base state (short-time accurate variation state) may be referred to as a “probability variation state”. A gaming state in which short-time control or high-opening control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a gaming state that is not in a high probability state (probability variation state) but in a high base state (short time state) is also referred to as a low probability high base state. Is done. A gaming state in which neither time-change control nor high-open control is performed without probability variation control, that is, a game state that is neither in a high-probability state (probability variation state) nor in a high base state (time-short state) is also referred to as a low probability low base state. Is done. The low accuracy low base state is a normal state in which neither the accuracy variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed, so it is distinguished from the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, etc. It may be referred to as “normal state”. Note that a gaming state that is not a big hit gaming state may be referred to as a “normal state” in distinction from the big hit gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state after the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system is reset) is a normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit is reached, and after that, a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), the high accuracy high base Controlled by the state.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability changes) and the number of STs after the 16R probability change big hit (the number of probability changes) may be different. Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed twice based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is achieved. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time reduction control in the same manner as when 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit is reached.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of probability variation) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided in which probability variation control is continued until the next big hit. When the probability variation big hit that continues the probability variation control until the next big hit is provided, a normal big hit that is not subjected to the probability variation control after the end may be further provided. For example, the normal opening round is controlled to the normal opening big hit state in which the normal opening round is executed 8 times (round), and the probability variation control is not performed after the completion (the time-shortening control or the high opening control may or may not be performed). ), 8R normal big hit may be provided.

  In addition, the probability variation control is terminated when it is determined that “there is a certain probability of falling” in the probability variation falling lottery executed every time a special game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state. It may be. In such an embodiment, after a special ST game with a predetermined number of STs (probable change number) is used, a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probable change number) is not used until the special game is completed. A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control and the high opening control.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative design. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit, the variation is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbols are aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is displayed temporarily.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Alternatively, a probable change promotion effect for notifying that the big hit is a probable big hit may be executed during the period until the next variable display game is started after the end of the final round.

  The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as the jackpot promotion effect (big hit number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect to be executed (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. 9 and various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the movable accessory 17 are mounted.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the action of an accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit for outputting a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or may be three or more. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each presentation control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. Thereafter, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big prize opening notifying that it is a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state (for example, “1” to “16”). Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start port winning notification command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied (at the time of the first start port winning designation command, first start port winning) Sometimes called command).

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize notification command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start opening prize specifying command, second start opening prize) Sometimes called hour command).

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the first special figure holding memory number is increased), the first holding memory number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting port winning notification command as the holding memory information. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure holding memory number is increased), the second holding memory number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting port winning notification command as the holding memory information. In addition, when the first start prize is generated, the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the first start opening prize notification command or the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second start prize is generated. In this case, the first reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in addition to the second start opening prize notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command. Further, when the first special figure reserved memory number (or the second special figure reserved memory number) increases, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL (or the second start-winning memory display area 5HR) or the like is displayed. A first reserved memory number addition designation command (or second reserved memory number addition designation command) for designating addition of the special figure reserved memory number (second special figure reserved memory number) is transmitted, and the first special figure reserved memory number ( Alternatively, the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (or the second reserved memory number) for designating the subtraction of the first special figure reserved memory number (or the second special figure reserved memory number) when the second special figure reserved memory number) decreases. (Memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of or in addition to the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved memory number addition designation command (total reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for designating addition (or subtraction) of the total reserved memory number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as a winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a “variation category command”) indicating a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 16), except for some cases (for example, when there is a first starting winning in a high base state or the like) when a starting winning occurs, the variable category The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 displays the variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. Or not.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 for one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like). Used when Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the display operation in the image display device 5 is also referred to as a display control command, the effect control command used to control the sound output operation by the speaker 8 is also referred to as an audio control command, and the lamp 9 An effect control command used to control the light emission operation is also referred to as a lamp control command, and an effect control command used to control the operation of the movable accessory 17 is also referred to as an accessory control command. It should be noted that, among the effect control commands, there are those related to a plurality of effect devices such as display control commands, voice control commands, lamp control commands, and accessory control commands. Good.

  The command D0XX is a big winning opening prize notification command for notifying that a game ball has won a big winning opening (sometimes referred to as a big winning opening prize designation command). The big prize opening prize notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when a game ball passes through the big prize opening, for example.

  The command D1XX is a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command that designates the start of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 and designates that the display result of the normal symbol is a hit. The command D2XX is a normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command that designates the start of variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 and designates that the display result of the normal symbol is lost. The command D3XX is a normal symbol variation end designation command for designating the end of normal symbol variation. If the variation time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state, it is not necessary to use the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Command E0XX is a magnetic abnormality notification designation command for designating notification that a magnetic abnormality has occurred. For example, a magnet sensor (not shown, also referred to as a magnetic sensor) is provided on the back of a predetermined area of the game area 2, and the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is used when the magnet sensor detects an abnormality (the magnet sensor indicating an abnormal value). When a signal is input), the signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, a magnet sensor detects abnormality, for example, when there exists an act which leads a game ball to a winning opening illegally using a magnet. As a method for detecting a magnetic abnormality, the abnormal value may be detected with the reference value kept constant, or the abnormal value may be detected with the magnetic value at power-on as the reference value.

  As described above, the effect control command shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and the effect control command used in the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, a gate passage notification command (also referred to as a gate passage designation command) for notifying that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 or a probability change confirmation notification command for notifying that a probability change big hit may be used.

  A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control that is executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is a highly accurate state or a short-time state. It is good to leave. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” and “PA2-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-3” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-3” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” belongs to the variation category “PB1”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-3” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variable category “PA4” and the variable category “PA5” are collectively referred to as “super reach (losing) variable category”, and the variable category “PB4” and variable category “PB5” are collectively referred to as “super reach (big hit). ) Fluctuation category ", the fluctuation category" PA4 ", the fluctuation category" PA5 ", the fluctuation category" PB4 ", and the fluctuation category" PB5 "are collectively referred to as" super-reach fluctuation category ".

  Among the super-reach variation categories, the variation category “PA5” and the variation category “PB5” are variation categories with an accessory action including the operation of the movable accessory 17, and the variation category “PA4” and the variation category “PB4” are This is a variation category that does not include the operation of the movable accessory 17 and does not include the operation of the accessory. That is, the movable accessory 17 does not operate in the super reach α, but the movable accessory 17 operates in the super reach β.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB1-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB1” is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern “PB3-1”.

  In addition, although the fluctuation category “PB1” has been described as a shortening / reach (big hit) fluctuation category, three symbols (for example, the same symbol) are stopped at the same time without going through reach, and the shortening / reach (big hit) becomes a big hit. It may be a non-reach (big hit) variable category. The variation pattern “PB1-1” when the variation category “PB1” is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation category is a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern. Note that “shortening / non-reach (big hit)” is also called “crash”, and “shortening / non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category” is also called “crash fluctuation category”. "Is also referred to as a" crash variation pattern ". Further, the variation category “PB1” may include a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern and a shortened / non-reach (big hit) variation pattern.

  The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the above, a variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed, or a variation in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) gusset (for example, a similar effect to a pseudo-continuous effect is executed but not temporarily stopped) is performed. A pattern may be prepared.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, a variation category for 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) may be provided. For example, variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, and “PC3” for 2R probability variation big hit (surprise) may be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” and “PC1-2” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Note that a non-reach (accuracy) variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed may be prepared.

  Variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice. Note that a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which quasi-continuous variation (effect) gusset is executed may be prepared.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-3” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice. Note that a super reach β (accuracy) variation pattern in which the pseudo-variable variation (effect) is performed may be prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 includes a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the game (special game using the second special figure), before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variable display result is the big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit) It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the display result determination table 130, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit). ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the state is the low probability state or the high probability state. It is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” and “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determination values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the low probability state. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of judgment values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With this setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” as compared with the case of the non-probability variation state (low probability state). When the game state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. A determination value is assigned, and in the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result in which the determination value in a predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit” May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation). Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the determination values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than in the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is provided, the second special figure game is more effective than the first special figure game. Alternatively, a smaller number of determination values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variable category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variable category is assigned to each variable category. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR5 for variation pattern determination is assigned to each variation pattern. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though a game ball has passed (entered) through a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A associates a hold number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special figure game that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates a reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and the CPU 103 generates a random number based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first starting condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 indicates data indicating flag values, an on state or an off state for each of the special figure process flag, the high probability flag, the high base flag, the big hit flag, and the like. Data is stored. The high-accuracy flag is a flag indicating whether the state is a high-accuracy state or a low-accuracy state. The high base flag is a flag indicating whether the base state is a high base state or a low base state. The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it is a big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a stored value (variation count value) of a variation counter (described later).

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124, an I / O 125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory) 17 etc.) is executed to control the rendering operation. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the receiving control CPU 120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect controlling CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The RTC circuit 126 is a time measuring means capable of measuring the time such as the current date and hour, minute and second. The RTC circuit 126 has a function of automatically adjusting the time measurement value to the Japan standard time periodically using a radio clock. When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC circuit 126 operates by receiving supply of power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). Timekeeping information by the RTC circuit 126 is supplied to the CPU 120 for effect control.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, in the ROM 121, an effect execution presence determination table for holding or the like that is referred to determine whether or not an effect such as holding is executed, or an effect pattern such as holding when it is determined that an effect such as holding is executed (for example, added) An effect pattern determination table such as a hold that is referred to in order to determine a display mode of hold display and a display mode of active display from time to time of digestion may be stored.

  In addition, the ROM 121 has a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, and the like). Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various production operations are realized by setting production control patterns. For example, the decorative display variable display operation corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. The hold effect, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening, the effect during closing), the ending effect, and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is composed of data, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating operation control contents and the like in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer. And the judgment value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is preset. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. That is, data indicating the switching timing of the production control may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content and processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like that is interlocked with a decorative symbol variable display operation during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. The movable combination control data includes, for example, data indicating the operation mode of the movable combination 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control for outputting sound from the speaker 8 in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control for causing the lamp 9 to emit light in a manner specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data are performed. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to an effect device that does not become a control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of movable accessory 17 etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the contents of control of the production operation in the apparatus and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. Let On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the production process flag, the high-accuracy flag, the high base flag, and the like. The

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value, which is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (first start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variation category command, first reserved memory number notification command) are one set or two commands (first start opening prize notification) Command, first reserved memory number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, among these commands transmitted from the main board 11, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing the symbol designation command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the first reserved memory number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the first start winning prize with each set and stores it in the storage area of the first start winning prize received command buffer 194A. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (first start opening winning notification command, symbol designating command, variable category command, first reserved memory number notification command) at the time of first starting winning, None of the storage areas for the buffer number (the storage area for storing the symbol designating command, the storage area for storing the variable category command, or the storage area for storing the first pending storage number notification command) In each buffer number storage area), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number notification command are stored. When the storage areas for a plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area for the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. The example shown in FIG. 10B represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of buffer numbers “1” to “3”. On the other hand, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives two commands at the time of the first start winning (the first start opening winning notification command and the first reserved memory number notification command), the buffer number that is a free area is stored. Area (storage area for storing symbol designation command (storage area indicated as “designation” in FIG. 10B)), storage area for storing variation category command (indicated as “variation category” in FIG. 10 (B)) Each of the buffer numbers in which nothing is stored in either the storage area) or the storage area for storing the first reserved memory number notification command (the storage area indicated as “notice of the reserved memory number” in FIG. 10B). The first reserved memory number notification command is stored in the storage area. When the storage areas of the plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the first pending storage number notification command is stored in the storage area of the smallest buffer number that is an empty area.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship). For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning in the second start winning opening, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Specifically, four commands (second start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variation category command, second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, among these commands transmitted from the main board 11, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number notification command can be stored for each buffer number. , A storage area for storing the symbol designating command, a storage area for storing the variable category command, and a storage area for storing the second reserved memory number notification command are secured.

  The effect control CPU 120 associates the command received from the main board 11 at the time of the second start prize and stores it in the storage area of the second start prize reception command buffer 194B in association with each set. For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control normally receives four commands (second start opening prize notification command, symbol designation command, variable category command, second reserved memory number notification command) at the time of the second start winning prize, The storage area for the buffer number (the storage area for storing the symbol designation command (the storage area indicated as “designation designation” in FIG. 10C)), the storage area for storing the variable category command (FIG. 10C) Nothing is stored in both the storage area indicated as “variable category” in FIG. 10 and the storage area for storing the second reserved memory number notification command (the storage area indicated as “notice of reserved memory number” in FIG. 10C). The symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the second reserved storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas of the buffer numbers that have not been set. When the storage areas for a plurality of buffer numbers are free areas, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the second reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area for the smallest buffer number that is an empty area. Note that the example shown in FIG. 10C represents a state in which commands are stored in the storage areas of the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, one command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number is deleted and deleted. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship). For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. In other words, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects related to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step) S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process of step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number update process in step S14, for example, at least a part of game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5) used on the main board 11 side is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

  Following the game random number update process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol process (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process, the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) of the normal symbol display 20 is controlled to change the normal symbol variable display or the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables tilting operation setting.

  Subsequent to the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the sensor error notification process (step S12) executed in the game control timer interrupt process. In the sensor error notification process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a magnet sensor signal indicating an abnormal value is input from the magnet sensor (step S20). If no magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; NO), the sensor error notification process is terminated.

  When a magnet sensor signal is input in step S20 (step S20; YES), the CPU 103 determines that a magnetic abnormality has occurred, sets a magnetic abnormality flag indicating that the magnetic abnormality has been detected (step S21), The error notification LED is turned on to notify that a magnetic abnormality has occurred (step S22), and a setting for transmitting a magnetic abnormality notification designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S23). Then, the sensor error notification process ends. The magnetic abnormality notification designation command set in step S23 is executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the main-side error process is completed. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is reached (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (start "1" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S207). Subsequent to the processing in step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning time process (FIG. 15) (step S208), and sets (clears) “0” in the start port buffer value (step S209).

  If it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is not on (step S201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value, (Step S202 (YES)) After executing the processing of Step S209, the CPU 103 receives the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203). If it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the second special figure hold memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 stores the value stored in the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (starting). "2" is set to (mouth buffer value) (step S210). Subsequent to the processing in step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning time process (FIG. 15) (step S211), sets (clears) “0” in the start port buffer value (step S212), and starts a winning determination process. Exit.

  When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure holding memory number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)), the start winning determination process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S210, S211 and S212.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, even when the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, the processing based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S <b> 215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and determining the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random value MR2 and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as holding information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure holding storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a start port winning notification command corresponding to the start port buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is performed. The start opening prize notification command set in step S219 is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Subsequent to the process in step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S220). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting the first reserved memory number notification command is performed. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting the second reserved storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process is terminated. Note that the reserved memory count notification command set in step S221 is executed, for example, when the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed after the special symbol process process ends. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of winning random number determination processing (step S220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 16A, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game state is a big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies that the big hit flag is not the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is on, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not on (when it is off). . Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 may identify whether the state is the high-predicted state or the low-predicted state by confirming the state of the high-predictive flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Good. Specifically, the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not on (when it is off). May be.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is present (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game state is a big hit gaming state in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that the game state is not the big hit game state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the game state is a big hit game state (step S402; YES), or if it is determined in step S403 that the base state is a high base state (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value. Is determined to be “2” (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start prize (start prize where the variation special chart is the second special figure). If it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; NO), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not in the high base state (step S403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S405). Specifically, when the CPU 103 is not in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the low-accuracy state (the value in the range of “8000” to “8189” is “big hit”) from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. When the table data assigned to the special figure display result is set and is in the high-accuracy state, the table data for the high-accuracy state (“8000” to “8818” is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result with the range value “big hit” is set, and the CPU 103 identifies the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and the high-accuracy flag is When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified that the state is in a low probability state, and different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the case of using the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table), when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table is used to If the buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S405, the CPU 103 determines that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with each determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 determines the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination value assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result in the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) And the maximum value (upper limit value) may be compared to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S406 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S406; YES), the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is shown. The big hit type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) the big hit type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets table data corresponding to the fluctuation special map from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 103, for example, compares the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type with the determination value of each big hit type in the big hit type determining table data set in accordance with the variation chart. Thus, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 may be determined.

  Subsequent to the process in step S407, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result obtained in the process in step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S406; NO), a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S406). S409). Note that the symbol designating command set in step S409 is executed mainly when the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 is executed after the special symbol process processing is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base state is set (step S410). Note that the process of step S410 is executed in the following four scenes (scene 1 to scene 4).
(Scene 1)
A scene that is not in the big hit gaming state and in the low base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (NO)). It may be the first start prize (start prize where the variation special figure is the first special figure) or the second start prize (start prize where the variable special figure is the second special figure).
(Scene 2)
A scene in which the second start winning is not in the big hit gaming state and in the high base state (when step S402 (NO), step S403 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 3)
In the big hit gaming state and when there is a second start winning in the low base state (when step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).
(Scene 4)
In the big hit gaming state and when there is a second start winning in the high base state (when step S402 (YES), step S404 (YES)).

  If it is determined in step S410 that the high base state is not set (step S410; NO), that is, in the case of the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 103 uses the low base state for the special figure display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S410 that the state is the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, in the case of scene 2 or scene 4, the CPU 103 determines the high base state according to the special figure display result. A variable category determination table is set (selected) (step S412).

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17A shows a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 17A, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” “C -TBL2 "" C-TBL3 "), one of the variation category determination tables is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” is selected, and when the number of reserved memories is 2 or 3, The variation category determination table “C-TBL2” is selected, and when the number of reserved storage is four, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is selected. Also, according to FIG. 17A, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state, one type of variable category determination table (“C-TBL4” in the figure) is used regardless of the number of reserved storage. ) Is selected.

  FIG. 17B shows a selection example in which any variation category determination table is selected from a plurality of variation category determination tables in the high base state. According to FIG. 17B, when the special figure display result is “lost” in the high base state, three types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” “C -TBL2 "" C-TBL3 "), one of the variation category determination tables is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” is selected, and when the number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 The variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is selected. Further, according to FIG. 17B, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the high base state, one type of variable category determination table (“C-TBL5” in the figure) is used regardless of the number of reserved storage. ) Is selected.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18A is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B. 18 (A), the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18 (C), FIG. The variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 18E are also the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. ) Are assigned to multiple types of variable categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2”, and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  FIG. 18B is the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” shown in the diagram of FIG. In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, four out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “3”) are variation categories. Assigned to “PA1”, 85 (values in the range of “4” to “88”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PA2”, and 8 (values in the range of “89” to “96”) are the fluctuation category. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, the variation category “PA1” is 4%, the variation category “PA2” is 85%, the variation category “PA3” is 8%, The category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2% and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1%.

  FIG. 18C is the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B. In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3, 64 (values in the range of “0” to “63”) are variation categories. 25 (values in the range of “64” to “88”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 8 (values in the range of “89” to “96”) are assigned to the variable category. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, the variation category “PA1” is 64%, the variation category “PA2” is 25%, the variation category “PA3” is 8%, The category “PA4” is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1%.

  FIG. 18D is the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” shown in the diagram of FIG. In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, 10 (values in the range of “0” to “9”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 are the variation categories. 50 (values in the range of “10” to “59”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB3”, and 30 (values in the range of “60” to “89”) are assigned to the fluctuation category. 10 (values in the range of “90” to “99”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, the variation category “PB1” is 10%, the variation category “PB3” is 50%, the variation category “PB4” is 30%, The category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 18E is the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” shown in the diagram of FIG. In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 18E, 60 (values in the range of “0” to “59”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 are the variation categories. Assigned to “PB1”, 20 (values in the range of “60” to “79”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PB3”, and 10 (values in the range of “80” to “89”) are fluctuation categories. 10 (values in the range of “90” to “99”) are assigned to the variation category “PB5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 18E, the variation category “PB1” is 60%, the variation category “PB3” is 20%, the variation category “PB4” is 10%, The category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 10%.

  Comparing FIG. 17 (A) and FIG. 17 (B), when the gaming state is the low base state and the special figure display result is “losing”, the number of reserved memories is “2” or “3” While the variable category determination table “C-TBL2” is determined, the reserved storage number is “2” or “3” when the gaming state is the high base state and the special figure display result is “lost”. Sometimes the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” is determined. Further, when the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” are compared, the determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” is 4%. On the other hand, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio of the variation category “PA1” is 64%. That is, when the gaming state is the high base state, the determination rate of the variation category “PA1” when the number of reserved memories is “2” or “3” is higher than when the gaming state is the low base state.

  Further, comparing FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, when the gaming state is the low base state and the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL4” is determined. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high base state and the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL5” is determined. Further, when the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” are compared, the determination rate of the variation category “PB1” is 10% in the variation category determination table “C-TBL4”. On the other hand, in the variation category determination table “C-TBL5”, the determination ratio of the variation category “PB1” is 60%. That is, when the gaming state is the high base state, the determination rate of the variation category “PB1” is set higher than when the gaming state is the low base state.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the determination rate of the variation category “PA1” is larger when the number of reserved memories is large than when the number of reserved memories is small. It is high. For example, when the gaming state is the low base state and the special figure display result is “losing”, the variation category in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the reserved storage number is “4” Determination ratio “64%” of “PA1”> Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the number of stored storages is “3” or “2”> The determination rate “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1”. Further, for example, when the gaming state is the high base state and the special figure display result is “lost”, the variation category determination table “C” selected when the number of reserved memories is “2” to “4”. -Determination rate "64%" of the variation category "PA1" in -TBL3 "> Determination of the variation category" PA1 "in the variation category determination table" C-TBL1 "selected when the reserved storage number is" 0 "or" 1 " The ratio is “0%”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super reach (losing) variation category (variation category “PA4” or The determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA5”) is kept constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination rate “1%” of the variation category “PA5” is set, and the variation category “PA4”. The decision rate is “2%”.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, the same (common) variation is used in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. There is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, the same variation category is determined regardless of any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Like that. For example, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is “99”, the variation category “PA5” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and the interest in the game can be improved. 18A to 18C, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” to In any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance that at least the reach is not achieved.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of step S411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not determined in step S410, the CPU 103 changes based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved memories according to the selection example shown in FIG. One of the variation category determination tables is selected from the category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL4”. Then, the table data constituting the selected variation category determination table is set. Specifically, when the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” in step S406, the CPU 103 configures the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” shown in FIG. Set table data. If the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “lost” in step S406, the CPU 103 configures the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1”. The table data constituting the variable category determination table “C-TBL2” is set when the reserved memory number is “2” or “3”, and the variable category determination table “C” is set when the reserved memory number is “4”. Table data constituting “C-TBL3” is set.

  Further, in the process of step S412 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the base state is the high base state, the CPU 103, based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved memories, according to the selection example shown in FIG. , One of the variation category determination tables is selected from the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5”, and the selected variation category determination table is selected. Set the table data that makes up Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines in step S406 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 configures the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” shown in FIG. Set table data. If the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “lost” in step S406, the CPU 103 configures the variable category determination table “C-TBL1” when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1”. Table data to be stored is set, and the table data constituting the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is set when the number of reserved storage is “2” to “4”.

  In the process of step S411, it has been described that the CPU 103 sets the variation category determination table for the low base state according to the special figure display result, but as described above, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation The category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” are the variation category determination table for the low base state according to “losing”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” It is a variation category determination table for the low base state according to “big hit”. Further, in the processing of step S412, the CPU 103 has been described as setting the variation category determination table for the high base state according to the special figure display result, but the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” and the variation category determination table “C” -TBL3 "is a variation category determination table for a high base state corresponding to" losing ", and a variation category determination table" C-TBL5 "is a variation category determination table for a high base state corresponding to" big hit ". is there. That is, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” are also the variation category determination table for the low base state corresponding to “losing”, and the high base state corresponding to “losing”. It is also a variable category determination table.

  After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines (determines) the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 determines the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15, and the variation category set in step S411 or step S412. It is only necessary to determine which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the determination table.

  Subsequent to the process of step S413, the CPU 103 transmits any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. After setting for this (step S414), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. .

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a variable display result or the like determined in advance in the special symbol normal process (step S110), a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a first fluctuation start command. (Or a second change start command) and the like. In the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation process, the special symbol is varied (variably displayed) in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the start of variation is changed to the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes a process for determining whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3” when the elapsed time after the variation starts reaches the special symbol variation time.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol and stops (displays) the confirmed special symbol, or the big hit flag is turned off. (If it is determined in advance that the variable display result is “lost” in the special symbol normal process (step S110)), a process for changing the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a process to be executed, or a big hit flag Includes a setting process for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) as a process to be executed when is in the ON state (when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in advance) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and when the big hit flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Is updated to “4”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process for setting the grand prize opening to be in an open state (for example, setting a solenoid driving signal for the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door to open the big prize opening) , Including a setting process for transmitting a command for notifying a prize winning opening. In the big hit release pre-processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time, whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number. Processing for determining the timing to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and setting for making the big winning opening closed (for example, the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door for closing the winning opening) For example, setting of a solenoid driving signal) and setting processing for transmitting a notification command after opening a special prize opening. In the big hit release processing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The processing after the big hit release in step S116 is processing executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After winning the jackpot is a process to determine whether or not the number of rounds in which the grand prize opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of big prize opening, or when the maximum number of big opening is not reached Includes processing to execute a notification command during the opening of a special winning opening as processing to be executed, and processing to transmit a hit end designation command as processing to be executed when the maximum number of large winning opening is reached It is out. In the post-hit opening process, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value for the number of big prize openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process to determine whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect) has passed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end presentation waiting time has passed This includes processing for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a highly accurate and high-base state, processing for setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit release process (step S115), the big hit release post-process (step S116), the big hit pre-release process (step S114), and the big hit end process (step S117) are awarded when the count switch 23 is turned on. It includes a transmission setting for transmitting the oral winning notification command.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process (step S110). In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure hold storage number is not “0” (step S231; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure from the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. The hold data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S232). That is, when there is a hold (holding data) of the second special figure game, the CPU 103 uses the second special figure hold storage unit as the change hold data regardless of whether or not the first special figure game is held. The numerical data corresponding to the hold number “1” of 151B (the hold data of the second special figure game extracted in step S217 as the earliest (oldest)) is read and temporarily stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation or the like. .

  Following the processing of step S232, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second special figure hold storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8) and also uses the second special figure hold storage unit 151B (see FIG. 8). 8) is shifted (step S233). Specifically, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second reserved memory count value, and at the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, an entry lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the reservation number). The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted up by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S233, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total pending storage count value. Subsequent to the processing in step S233, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step S234).

  If it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. Determination is made (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  If it is determined in step S235 that the first special figure hold storage number is not “0” (step S235; NO), the CPU 103 starts the special figure from the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. The pending data (numerical data) of the random number MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are read out and temporarily stored (step S236). In other words, when there is no hold (holding data) of the second special figure game (step S231 (YES)) and there is a hold of the first special figure game, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation holding data as the change data. The numerical data corresponding to the holding number “1” in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A (the first special figure game holding data extracted in step S217) is read out and stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation. Store temporarily in

  Following the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special figure hold memory number stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (see FIG. 8), and the first special figure hold storage unit 151A (FIG. 8) is shifted (step S237). Specifically, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and at the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number). The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4” are shifted up by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S237, the CPU 103 may subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value. Subsequent to the processing in step S237, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, to “1” (step S238).

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  After executing the process of step S234 or the process of step S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as step S405 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S405, the start port buffer is used. Although the value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103, like step S406 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16A, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the special data set in step S239. In the table display result determination table data, the individual judgment values assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result are compared one by one, for example, to make the special figure display result (“big hit” or “lost”) ) Should be determined.

  Following the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is a “hit” (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that the game is a “hit” (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the on state (step S242). Note that the big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S117. Subsequent to the process of step S242, the CPU 103 executes a big hit type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S244, the CPU 103 stores the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S244. A jackpot type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is stored. As an example, if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process in step S244 is “16R probability variable big hit”, the CPU 103 sets “1” in the big hit type buffer value, and if “8R probability variable big hit”, the big hit type Set “2” to the buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241 (NO)), or after the processing in step S245 is executed, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, Sets a special special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S248). Subsequent to step S248, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and ends the special symbol normal process.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol is executed. End normal processing. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S250). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110). When it is determined that the big hit flag is in the ON state (step S250; YES), an effect control command (display result designation command) corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S244 (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is displayed. Transmission setting is performed (step S251). When it is determined that the big hit flag is not in the on state (step S250; NO), the transmission control of the effect control command (display result designation command) indicating the loss is performed (step S252).

  After executing the process of step S251 or the process of step S252, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S253). When it is determined in step S253 that the high base state is not set (step S253; NO), the CPU 103 is for the low base state corresponding to the special figure display result as in step S411 of the winning random number determination process. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S254). That is, when the jackpot flag is not in the on state, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL2”, or the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” according to the number of reserved memories. When the jackpot flag is on, the variable category determination table “C-TBL4” is set.

  When it is determined in step S253 that the state is the high base state (step S253; YES), the CPU 103 is for the high base state corresponding to the special figure display result in the same manner as in step S412 of the winning random number determination processing. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S255). That is, when the jackpot flag is not in the on state, the CPU 103 sets either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” according to the number of reserved memories, When the flag is on, the variable category determination table “C-TBL5” is set.

  After executing the process of step S254 or the process of step S255, the CPU 103 selects the variation category based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category, similarly to step S413 of the winning random number determination process. Determination is made (step S256).

  Subsequent to the process of step S256, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on the variation category determined in step S256 and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern (step S257). In the process of step S257, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category determined in step S256, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern includes any variation pattern. The variation pattern may be determined based on whether it is within the range.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table. In the process of step S257, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA2” in step S256, the CPU 103 sets a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA2” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of “0” to “39”, the variation pattern “PA2-1” is determined, and the range of “40” to “99” is selected. When it is, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is determined. For example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA3” in step S256, the CPU 103 sets (selects) the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category “PA3” shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is in the range of “0” to “79”, the variation pattern “PA3-1” is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of “80” to “99”, the variation is determined. The pattern “PA3-2” is determined. The same applies to the case where another variation category is determined in step S256.

  Note that the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or, like the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). May be extracted and stored as pending data, and read at step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal process (step S110).

  Subsequent to step S257, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step S258). In addition to the variation pattern designation command, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a first variation start command for designating the start of the first special figure game (or a second variation start command for designating the start of the second special figure game). May be performed. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S259), and the value of the special figure process flag. Is updated to “2” corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S260), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S260, the special symbol variation process is executed when the next timer interruption occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process (step S113). In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step S291). The special figure confirmation display flag is provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example. The special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol (step S292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fixed display time which is a fixed special symbol stop display time (step S294). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined special figure fixed display time as a timer initial value of a special figure fixed display time timer value which is a stored value of a special figure fixed display time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Should be set. In this embodiment, the time related to the fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure confirmation display time is a time not related to the fluctuation pattern (for example, a fixed time), but in addition to the special figure fluctuation time, The special figure confirmation display time may also be a time related to the variation pattern. For example, the total time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure confirmation display time is the time according to the fluctuation pattern, and the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer and the timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer according to the fluctuation pattern May be set.

  Subsequent to the process of step S294, the CPU 103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the on state (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). In the process of step S296, for example, it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer set with the timer initial value in step S294 has timed out (whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). . If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (S298). If the big hit flag is on (step S298; YES), the big hit start time waiting time is set (step S299). Specifically, as a timer initial value of the jackpot start stage waiting time timer value that is a stored value of the jackpot start stage waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, a predetermined jackpot start stage waiting time is set. Should be set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the CPU 103 sets, for example, a big hit start flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like (step S302). The big hit start flag is a flag referred to in the big hit release pre-processing (step S114). The CPU 103 is a flag that determines whether it is before the first round (the first round) or not by the big hit start time flag, although the big hit release pre-processing is executed before the start of each round. Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs settings for ending the time reduction state or the probability variation state (step S303). In the process of step S303, for example, the CPU 103 may clear and set the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the off state, respectively. Note that the processing in step S303 may be omitted when the low probability and low base state has already been established.

  Subsequent to the process of step S303, settings for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S304). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. In this embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not. However, when the game state has changed (for example, from the short-time state or the probability change state to the normal state). The game state designation command may be transmitted only when it has changed. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified from the contents of the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (including the fact that the gaming state has changed). Instead, the current gaming state may be specified by receiving the hit start designation command. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S304 or the like. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S305), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; NO), it is determined whether or not the time-short state or the probability variation state is to be ended (step S306). In the process of step S306, for example, the CPU 103 executes the following process. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, and if not, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the variation counter. The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of executions of the variable display game that executes the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the variable display game that executes the time reduction control. The ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction number are set in the big hit end process (step S117). The CPU 103 having added 1 to the value of the fluctuation number counter compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after the addition of 1 with the ST number. If the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the ST number, the gaming state is less likely to be low. The base state is set (the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag are cleared), and the set values of the ST count and the short-run count may be cleared to “0”. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions and the number of STs are the same (both are 70 times), so the value of the variation counter after 1 addition may be compared with the number of time reductions. Further, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs are different, each may be individually compared. That is, the CPU 103 compares the value of the fluctuation number counter after the addition of 1 with the number of time reductions, and if the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the number of time reductions, the CPU 103 sets the low base state. If the value of the variation counter is larger than the ST count, the low probability state may be set.

  Subsequent to the process of step S306, setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the effect control board 12 side. In this embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state has changed or not. However, when the game state has changed (for example, from the short-time state or the probability change state to the normal state). The game state designation command may be transmitted only when it has changed. On the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified from the contents of the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (including the fact that the gaming state has changed). The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of executions of variable display on the side of the effect control board 12 independently of the side of the board 11. In this case, the game state designation command does not have to be transmitted by the process of step S307 or the like. Thereafter, the special symbol process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S308), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit end process (step S117). In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-hit opening post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not.

  When it is determined in step S311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S311 that the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S311). S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a high probability state (probability change state) by turning on a high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the high base state provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the high base state by turning it on (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to the high probability and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the ST number and the short time number to “0” (step S318), clears (resets) the big hit flag to the off state (step S319), The value of the process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S320), and the jackpot end process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the setting value of 70 time reductions are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot and the setting value of ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) for the 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) for the 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit. In addition, when the set value of the ST number (the number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions is not different between the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the case of the 16R probability variation big hit (when the same value is set), the processing of step S312 (a big hit type) The reading of the buffer value may be omitted.

  FIG. 24A is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S130). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S130, it is determined whether or not the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if it is off, the gate passage determination process ends. On the other hand, when the gate switch 21 is on, a general figure hold count value indicating the number of general figure reservations stored, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general figure storage unit 151C, is determined in advance as a general figure reservation upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the obtained value is obtained. At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passing of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value has not been reached, for example, random numbers for updating the usual figure display result may be selected from numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is extracted. The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, whereby the random value MR4 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in the gate passage determination process that the gate switch 21 is on, a setting for transmitting a gate passage designation command is performed. In the present embodiment, when a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, a gate passage designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  After executing the gate passage determination process of step S130, the CPU 103 determines which of the processes of steps S131 to S134 shown in FIG. 24 (A) depending on the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select and execute.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S131 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of the reserved data stored in the general symbol reservation storage unit 151C. At this time, for example, when there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 151C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After executing the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”. In the normal symbol normal processing, when “per normal symbol” is determined, a normal symbol variation start designation (per unit) command that specifies normal symbol variation start and designates the normal symbol per unit is transmitted. . On the other hand, if it is determined to be “normal map loss”, a normal symbol fluctuation start specification (loss) command is transmitted to specify that the normal map loss will occur.

  In the general map display result determination process, a predetermined general map display result determination table is referred to based on numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 151C. The general map display result is determined. In the common map display result determination table, the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR4 for determining the general map display result is determined according to whether or not the high opening control is performed. It is only necessary to be assigned to the general map display result of “Figure Loss”.

  FIG. 24B is an example of a determination ratio of a general map display result or the like based on a general map display result determination table. According to the example shown in FIG. 24 (B), the determination ratio for determining whether or not the normal map display result is “per normal map” is varied depending on whether or not the high opening control is performed. Specifically, when the high opening control is performed (for example, in the high base state), the ratio is higher than when the high opening control is not performed (for example, in the low base state). Therefore, the general map display result is determined as “per general map”. As a result, when the high opening control is performed, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal game” than when the high opening control is not performed. The frequency at which the second start winning opening formed in the state is in the open state or the expanded open state is increased, and the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening.

  In addition, when the high opening control is performed, the normal time fluctuation time is set shorter than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the interval for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is shorter when the high release control is performed than when the high release control is not performed. The interval at which the variable display result is derived and displayed is shortened, the frequency at which the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state or the expanded open state is increased, and the game ball has the second start winning opening. Easy to pass. Further, when the high opening control is performed, the opening time and the number of times of opening are set so that the second start winning opening is in the open state or the expanded opening state, compared to when the high opening control is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control is performed, the time and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the open state or the expanded open state are increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. It will be easier to pass through the starting prize opening. Note that the setting for setting the second start winning opening to the open state or the expanded open state may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S133 or the normal electric accessory operation process in step S134.

  The normal symbol variation process of step S132 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 performs setting for varying the normal symbol, and the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to vary is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time. Then, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “2”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S133 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the normal symbol variation based on the elapse of the normal symbol variation time, and the fixed normal symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed. Make settings. When the value is “per normal”, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “3”, and when the value is “normal”, the value of the general process flag is updated to “0”. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S134 is executed when the value of the general process flag is “3”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per ordinary figure”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed.

  Next, various images displayed on the image display device 5 will be described. On the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control main processing (described later), whereby various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, etc.). ) Is performed.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various images displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. 25A is a diagram illustrating an image (image name) and an image size (image display area) corresponding to each effect, notification, and the like executed in the display area of the image display device 5. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, when performing error notification, an error notification image having an image size of “large” is displayed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 performs error notification using the error notification image of the image size “large”. Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, when a variable display effect (effect by decorative design) is executed, a decorative design (decorative design image) having an image size of “large” is displayed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect using the decorative pattern of the image size “large”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, when a predetermined effect is executed, a predetermined effect image having an image size “small” is displayed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes the predetermined effect using the predetermined effect image having the image size “small”. The predetermined effect is an effect related to the opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  In addition, when the effect execution notification is executed, an effect execution notification image of the image size “small” is displayed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect execution notification using the effect execution notification image of the image size “small”. The effect execution notification is notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In the present embodiment, step 5 (SU5) of step-up notice effect (described later), group notice effect (described later), and accessory effect each correspond to the notification target effect. That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect execution notification, when SU5 is executed, the fact that SU5 is executed is notified, and when the group notice effect is executed, the fact that the group notice effect is executed is notified. In the case where the accessory effect is executed, the fact that the accessory effect has been executed is notified.

  Similarly, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect effect effect (described later) using an effect effect effect image having an image size of “large”. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs display such as hold (hold display, active display) using the display image such as hold of the image size “small”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice effect (described later) using a group notice effect image having an image size of “large”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance zone effect (described later) using a chance zone effect image having an image size of “small”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a step-up notice effect (described later) using the step-up notice effect image having the image size “large”.

  FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. The RAM 122 stores a Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image shown in FIG. In the Z value setting table, as shown in FIG. 25B, the Z value of each image is set. The Z value indicates a layer for displaying an image. The smaller the Z value, the more the image is displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and the higher the Z value, the back side (back side, lower side) in the depth direction. An image is displayed on the layer. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 25B, when the error notification image with the Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image with the Z value “9” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the chance with the Z value “9” is displayed. An error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed in front of the zone effect image. Further, for example, when a group notice effect image with a Z value “8”, a chance zone effect image with a Z value “9”, and a step-up notice effect image with a Z value “10” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the Z value A chance zone effect image with a Z value of “9” is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image with “10”, and a group notice effect image with a Z value of “8” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image with a Z value of “9”. Is displayed. Note that the above-described images and Z values are examples. For example, the Z value of the background (background image) is “12”. Hereinafter, an X image having a Z value “N” may be referred to as an X image having a Z value “N”.

  Note that the Z value of the effect execution notification image is any one of “3” to “5” as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the number of notifications is 3 (when the execution of three effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified), the notification start order is third, and “1” is notified. In the above case (when notifying the execution of two or more effects among SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect) “2” when the notification start order is second, and when the number of notifications is 1 or more It is “3” when the notification start order is the first in the case where the execution of one or more effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25B, the decorative symbol has a different Z value depending on what state it is in. Specifically, “11” is displayed during variable display, “1” is displayed during stop display (2 seconds after stop display), and stop display is performed (after 2 seconds have elapsed after stop display). Sometimes “11”.

  26 and 27 are diagrams illustrating examples of various images. FIG. 26A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 26A includes a pictogram image G1 for notifying that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 for notifying a message “Error has occurred! Please call a staff member”. The error notification image display time (error notification notification time) may be, for example, 30 seconds. Further, it may be displayed until the error is resolved. Further, the display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area that combines the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2. That is, the display area combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 is “large”. The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 26A, but are compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images), and are images of error notification images. Anything that can be said to be “large” in size is acceptable. Note that an image whose image size falls within the upper predetermined number (for example, the fifth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image that does not enter the upper predetermined number may be referred to as an image size “small”. In addition, an image whose ratio of the image size in the display area of the image display device 5 is a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) or more is referred to as an image size “large”, and an image less than the predetermined ratio is referred to as an image size “small”. Good.

  FIG. 26B shows an example of a decorative design (during stop display / two seconds after stop display). The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 26 (B) is the left symbol (“3” in the example of FIG. 26 (B)) during the stop display (two seconds after the stop display), the middle symbol (example of FIG. 26 (B)). "7"), the right design ("4" in the example of FIG. 26B) is included. In the present embodiment, the Z value of the decorative symbol during stop display is 2 seconds after the stop display (before 2 seconds after stop display) and after 2 seconds after the stop display. Therefore, the stop display time of the decorative design is set to be longer than 2 seconds (for example, 3 seconds) so that stop display with different Z values can be distinguished.

  The image size of the decorative design shown in FIG. 25A, specifically, the image size of the decorative design during stop display (2 seconds after the stop display) as shown in FIG. This is the size of the display area that combines the display area of the middle symbol and the display area of the right symbol. That is, the display area including the right symbol display area, the middle symbol display small area, and the right symbol display area is “large”. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not limited to those shown in FIG. 26B, but are compared with other images (or without being compared with other images), and are displayed as decorative images. Anything that can be said to be “large” in size is acceptable.

  FIG. 26C shows a predetermined effect image (an example). The predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 26C includes a roulette table image G16 for displaying a predetermined effect symbol (for example, a result of “O”, “X” after variable display is displayed after variable display, etc.), and a predetermined effect image. It includes an effect design image G17. The display time of the predetermined effect image (the execution time of the predetermined effect) is, for example, a time corresponding to the effect time by the selected predetermined effect pattern. The black arrow “↓” in the image G17 represents that the predetermined effect design is changing. In the predetermined effect, when the image G17 indicating the change “◯” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed (the result “X” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed). Similarly, when the image G17 is displayed once and finally the image G17 showing the result “◯” is displayed), the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to the open state. While the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state, the display is switched from the result “◯” to the wording “open”, for example. Note that the result “◯” may continue to be displayed while the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the open state. On the other hand, when the image G17 indicating the result “x” is displayed after the image G17 indicating the change is displayed, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is not controlled to the open state. In addition, the direction of variable display of a predetermined effect design is not limited to the vertical direction (vertical direction), but may be the horizontal direction (horizontal direction).

  The image size of the predetermined effect image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area that is the sum of the display area of the image G16 and the display area of the image G17. That is, the display area combining the display area of the image G16 and the display area of the image G17 is “small”. The image G16 and the image G17 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27C, and the image size of the predetermined effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything that can be said to be “small” may be used.

  FIG. 26D shows an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 26 (D) is a pictogram image G3 that notifies the executed notification target effect (step-up notice effect step 5 (SU5), group notice effect, and accessory effect) in an identifiable manner. Contains. The pictogram image G3 is a general term for a part or all of the pictogram image G3-1 to the pictogram image G3-3 (described later). For example, the display time of the effect execution notification image (the notification time of the effect execution notification) may be 20 seconds. Depending on the type of notification target effect, the display time of the effect execution notification image may be varied.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is “small”. The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 26D, and the image size of the effect execution notification image is “comparison with other plural images (or without comparing with other plural images)”. Anything that can be said to be small is acceptable.

  FIG. 26E shows in detail the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 of FIG. In FIG. 26 (E), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 26 (E), the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “2”. In FIG. 26 (E), the pictogram image G3-3 notifies the third effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “1”. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 26E, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed in front of a pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”, and a pictogram image G3 having a Z value “2” is displayed. A pictogram image G3-3 having a Z value “1” is displayed on the front side of -2.

  In FIG. 26 (F), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 26 (F), pictogram image G <b> 3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2 and the Z value is “2”. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 26F, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed in front of a pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”. In FIG. 26 (G), the pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 1, and the Z value is “3”.

  FIG. 27A shows an effect effect effect image (an example). The effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 27A includes an effect image G4 that gives a video effect to an effect effect (specifically, movement (lowering) of the movable accessory 17). The display time of the effect effect effect image (execution time of the effect effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. Depending on the operation mode of the movable accessory 17, the display time of the accessory effect effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is “large”. The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 27A, and the image size of the effect effect effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 27B shows a display image (one example) such as a hold. The display image such as hold shown in FIG. 27B includes a first hold display image G5, a second hold display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 and the second hold display image G6 differs depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 varies depending on the display time of variable display. Note that the hold display image may include an image indicating the active display area AHA.

  The image size of the display image such as the hold display shown in FIG. 25A is a display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7. Is the size of That is, the display area including the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7 is “small”. The first hold display image G5, the second hold display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27B, but are compared with other images (or with other images). It is sufficient that the image size of the display image such as the hold can be said to be “small” without comparison.

  FIG. 27C shows a group notice effect image (an example). The group notice effect image shown in FIG. 27C includes a character image G8 constituting the group. The display time of character image G8 (execution time of group notice effect) may be, for example, 5 seconds. Depending on the character image G8 displayed in the group notice effect, the display time of the group notice effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the group notice effect image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is “large”. The character image G8 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 27C, and the image size of the group notice effect image is “ Anything that can be said to be “large” is acceptable.

  FIG. 27D shows a chance zone effect image (an example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 27D includes a character image G9 for informing a message “chance !!” and a pictogram image G10 for informing that it is a chance. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 (chance zone effect execution time) varies depending on the number of hold displays, the digest time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area that combines the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10. That is, the display area combining the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is “small”. The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 27D, but are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images). Any image size can be said to be “small”.

  FIG. 27E shows a step-up notice effect image (an example). The step-up notice effect image is a frame image G11 that is displayed last in step 1 (SU1), a frame image G12 that is displayed last in step 2 (SU2), a frame image G13 that is displayed last in step 3 (SU3), a step 4 (SU4) includes a frame image G14 that is displayed last, step 5 (SU5) includes a frame image G15 that is displayed last. That is, the display area is enlarged every time the step-up is performed. In the frame images G11 to G15, characters and the like are displayed according to SU1 to SU5, but are not shown. Note that the display time of each of the frame images G11 to G15 may be, for example, 1 second (thus, for example, 5 seconds when proceeding to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 25A is the size of the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is “large”. The frame image G15 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 27E, and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 27F shows an example of a decorative symbol (during variable display). The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 27F includes a left symbol (indicated by an arrow), a middle symbol (indicated by an arrow), and a right symbol (indicated by an arrow) during variable display. Note that the variable display time of the decorative design varies depending on the variation pattern.

  The image size of the decorative design shown in FIG. 25A, specifically, the image size of the decorative design during variable display as shown in FIG. 27F is larger than the image size of the decorative design during stop display. Specifically, the vertical direction is made longer than the image size of the decorative pattern during the stop display so that the decorative pattern appears to be variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Note that the direction of variable display of decorative symbols is not limited to the vertical direction (vertical direction), but may be the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) or the depth direction (three-dimensional direction).

  FIG. 27G shows an example of a decorative design (stop display being performed / after two seconds have elapsed after stop display). As shown in FIG. 27 (G), the display mode of the decorative pattern (stopped display / after 2 seconds after stop display) is different from the display mode of the decorative pattern (stopped display / two seconds after stop display). They are the same (however, as described above, both Z values are different).

  28 and 29 are conceptual diagrams schematically showing various image layers. In FIGS. 28 and 29, the numbers on the Z axis are Z values. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 25B, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed on the foreground layer, and the Z value “1” is displayed. Is displayed on the layer behind one of the error notification images, and a predetermined effect image having a Z value of “2” is displayed on the decorative pattern (stop display / stop display). An effect execution notification image (third) that is displayed on one back layer for the next 2 seconds) and has a Z value “3” is displayed on one back layer of the predetermined effect image, and the Z value “4” is displayed. The effect execution notification image (second) having the Z value “5” is displayed on the next layer of the effect execution notification image (third), and the effect execution notification image (2). )) On the layer on the back side, and a Z value “6” The effect effect image is displayed on one layer behind the effect execution notification image (first), the hold display image having the Z value “7” is displayed on one layer behind the effect effect effect image, and Z A group notice effect image having a value “8” is displayed on a layer behind one of the hold display images, and a chance zone effect image having a Z value “9” is displayed on one layer behind the group notice effect image. , A step-up notice effect image having a Z value “10” is displayed on one layer behind the group notice effect image, and a decorative pattern (variably displayed) or a decorative pattern (stop display) having a Z value “11”. 2 seconds after the middle / stop display is displayed) is displayed on one layer on the back side of the step-up notice effect image.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. 30 (A) shows variable display effects (effects with decorative designs), predetermined effects, step-up notice effects (SU4), chance zone effects, group notice effects, hold display, etc., execution of effect notification (group notice effects). An example of display operation in the image display device 5 when the periods overlap is shown. Note that the decorative design shown in FIG. 30A is being variably displayed. FIG. 30 (B) shows variable display effects (effects with decorative patterns), predetermined effects, step-up notice effects (SU5), chance zone effects, group notice effects, hold display, etc., effect effects effect, effect execution notification (SU5). ), A display operation example in the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the effect execution notification (group notice effect) and the effect execution notification (object effect) overlap. Note that the decorative design shown in FIG. 30B is being variably displayed. As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side, and an image having a small Z value is drawn on the near side.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 31 (A) to 31 (C) are all displayed on the image display device 5 when the execution periods of display such as variable display effects (effects by decorative designs), predetermined effects, chance zone effects, and hold are overlapped. An operation example is shown.

  The decorative design shown in FIG. 31A is being variably displayed. Since the Z value of the decorative design is “11” during variable display, the decorative design (during variable display) has, for example, a predetermined effect having a Z value “2” as shown in FIG. It is displayed behind the image. The decorative design shown in FIG. 31B is in the stop display (2 seconds after the stop display). Since the Z value of the decorative symbol is “1” when the stop display is being performed (2 seconds after the stop display), as shown in FIG. 31B, the decorative symbol (2 during the stop display / after the stop display) is displayed. For example) is displayed in front of a predetermined effect image having a Z value “2”. The decorative design shown in FIG. 31C is in the stop display (after 2 seconds have elapsed after the stop display). The Z value of the decorative symbol is “11” when the stop display is being performed (after 2 seconds have elapsed after the stop display), and therefore, as shown in FIG. After 2 seconds have elapsed since the display, for example, it is displayed on the back side of the predetermined effect image having the Z value “2”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and turns it off (step S73). Command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  Subsequent to the command analysis processing in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes error notification processing (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control process processing (step S76). In the effect control process in step S76, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17 and the like) are used based on the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Judgment, determination, setting, etc. related to the production operation that was performed are performed.

  Subsequent to the effect control process in step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number update process in step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  It has been described that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 11 on the side of the effect control board 12 is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method for generating an interrupt for receiving a production control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a presentation control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the command analysis process (step S74). In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). If it is determined that there is no received command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

  When it is determined in step S501 that there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize notification command (step S502). . The effect control CPU 120 may confirm the MODE data of the received command, for example, and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 3).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value set in advance as the reception waiting time for the first reserved memory number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the command is not the first start opening prize notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a second start opening prize notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start opening prize notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second reserved storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a timer initial value, which is set in advance as a reception waiting time for the second reserved memory number notification command, in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the command is not the second start opening winning notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that the command is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the command is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a first reserved memory number notification command (step S508). ). If it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the first pending storage count notification wait time Is cleared (step S509).

  When it is determined in step S508 that the command is not the first reserved memory number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command. (Step S510). If it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the second pending storage count notification waiting time Is cleared (step S511).

  If it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506 (YES)), if it is determined in step S507 that it is a variable category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 sends the received command to an empty area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B. Is stored in the empty area (step S512). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the reception command is the first start opening prize notification command or the start opening prize notification command immediately before the reception command is the first start opening prize notification command. In the case (when the second start opening winning notification command is not received after receiving the first starting opening winning notification command), the received command is stored in an empty area in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A; When the received command is the second starting port winning notification command, or when the starting port winning notification command immediately before the received command is the second starting port winning notification command (the second starting port winning notification command is received) If the first start opening prize notification command has not been received after the first start winning prize received command buffer 194 is received. Stored in the free space in. Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). . Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  When it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S518). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the gaming state designation command and specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the error notification notification period (step S141). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification (which may be the same configuration as the effect control pattern shown in FIG. 9) is already set as the use pattern, If it is already set, it may be determined whether or not it is an error notification period based on the set contents (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). If no magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing is terminated.

  When the magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) error notification operation control in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0). (Step S143), the error notification process is terminated. Further, even when it is the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), the error notification operation control is executed (continued) in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0) (step S143). The error notification process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step S143, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the notification control pattern corresponding to the error notification of the magnetic abnormality as the usage pattern, and the display control data included in the set notification control pattern is designated. The display control command to be transmitted is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and the Z value (Z value = 0) is transmitted. ), FIG. 25B and FIG. 26A are displayed in the uppermost layer (Z value = 0).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S76). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (first start winning reception command buffer 194A or second start winning reception command buffer 194B), and receives As a command, a process for determining whether or not a start opening prize notification command has been received, a process for determining an effect such as holding, etc. are executed.

  Subsequent to the winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined effect process related to the opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B (step S180). In the predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command, normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command) is received. The process for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and the type of the predetermined effect is executed.

  Subsequent to the predetermined effect process (step S180), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the processes of steps S170 to 177 in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the apparatus 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined to start the variable display of decorative symbols (that is, when a variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. , Processing for performing an effect control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), a value of a fluctuation time timer, etc.) and a display operation such as a first hold display, a second hold display, and an active display This includes processing for performing setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the display operation). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect process, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the variable display start of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is the special figure variable time) And the like. In the effect processing during variable display, when the variable time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special symbol waiting process is a process executed when the confirmed decoration symbol is “losing”, and a game state setting process at the time of changing to set the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a case where the confirmed ornament symbol is “big hit” The process to be executed includes a process for making a setting for performing a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the waiting process per special figure, when the confirmed decorative symbol is “lost”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value, and when the confirmed decorative symbol is “big hit”, Update the value to “4”.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process for determining whether or not a big prize opening opening notification command has been received, or a process to be executed when a big winning opening release notification command is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the open state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening). In the big hit starting process, when the big prize opening opening notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The in-round process is a process for determining whether or not a notification command after opening the big prize opening is received, or a process to be executed when a notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (a special variable prize in each round). This includes a process for performing settings for performing an effect performed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during closing). In the in-round processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” when the notification command after the special winning opening is received is received.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. Post-round processing is performed as a process for determining whether or not a winning prize opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, or a process to be executed when receiving a winning prize opening notification command. Setting for performing an ending effect (for example, for an ending effect), for example, a process for performing a setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or a process to be executed when a hit end designation command is received. For example, setting of a corresponding effect control pattern and an ending effect execution time timer value). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” when the command for opening the special winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” when the winning end designation command is received. To do.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. Whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the post-round processing (step S176) has timed out or not (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time) No.) and a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a highly accurate and high base state as a process executed when the ending effect execution time timer times out (provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191) And a process for setting the ST count and the number of time reductions. In the post-hit end processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of winning effect determination processing (S150). In the winning effect determining process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the starting winning reception command buffer (first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). Is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start opening winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored contents in the second start prize reception command buffer 194B ( In step S153), it is determined whether or not a second start port winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time-short state (highly accurate high-base state) is established (step S152). When it is determined that the time is not short (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing such as hold (step S160A). In the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A, a process for determining the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL (specifically, the effect such as hold in the first start prize storage display area 5HL) is determined. A process for determining whether or not to execute, and a process for determining an effect pattern such as a hold when it is determined to be executed). Details will be described later.

  After executing the effect determination process such as hold (step S160A), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the effect determination process such as hold (step S160B). Specifically, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the effect such as hold in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A, the effect such as the hold pattern determined in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A is used. The information indicating the display mode (that is, the display mode after addition specified by the production pattern such as the hold and the display mode after each shift) corresponds to the buffer number of the first start win in the first start win received command buffer 194A. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is stored in association with the buffer number. Further, for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the effect such as the hold is not executed in the effect determination process such as the hold in step S160A, a normal display mode (for example, white) is added as the display mode after the addition and after each shift. ) Is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  After executing the process of step S160B, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance zone effect determination process (step S161A), and stores the determination details of the chance zone effect (step S161B). Details of the chance zone effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S161B, the CPU 120 for effect control adds a first hold display based on the determination content stored in step S160B (step S162). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control executes (starts) operation control for adding the first hold display to the first start-winning storage display area 5HL in the eighth layer from the top (Z value = 7). In more detail, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. An effect control pattern to be displayed is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 and the Z value (Z Value = 7) is transmitted, and the hold etc. display image (FIG. 25 (A), FIG. 25 (B), FIG. 27 (B)) with the new first hold display added is displayed as the eighth layer from the top. (Z value = 7). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time-short state (highly accurate high base state) is set (step S156). When it is determined that the time is short (highly accurate high base state) (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes effect determination processing such as hold (step S163A). The effect determination process such as hold in step S163A is the same as the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A. That is, in the effect determination processing such as hold in step S163A, a process for determining the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR (specifically, hold in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) A process for determining whether or not to execute an effect, and a process for determining an effect pattern such as a hold when it is determined to be executed).

  After executing the effect determination process such as holding (step S163A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163B, step S164A, step S164B, and step S165, and ends the winning effect determination process. It should be noted that the processes of Step S163B, Step S164A, Step S164B, and Step S165 related to the second start opening winning are similar to the processes of Step S160B, Step S161A, Step S161B, and Step S162 related to the first starting opening winning, respectively. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S155 that the time is short (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time is not short (step S156: NO), a holding addition process according to the start opening prize designation is executed. (S166). Specifically, when the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152: YES, step S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect such as hold in the effect determination process such as hold in step S160A. As in the case where it is determined not to be stored, information indicating a normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as a display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, and the first hold display displayed in the normal display mode is first started. Add to the winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154: YES, step S156: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold etc. effect in the effect determination process such as hold in step S163A. As in the case of the above, the information indicating the normal display mode (for example, white) is stored as the display mode after addition and after each shift, and the second hold display displayed in the normal display mode is displayed as the second start-winning memory display. Add to area 5HR. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect determination process (steps S160A and S163A) such as hold. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process such as hold. In the effect determination processing such as hold shown in FIG. 37A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a plurality of types of hold execution execution determination table (effect such as hold depending on the type of variable category) stored in the ROM 121. From the execution presence / absence determination table), an effect execution presence / absence determination table according to the variation category indicated by the variation category command is selected and set (step S9000).

  FIG. 37 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not an effect such as holding is executed. According to the example shown in FIG. 37 (B), whether or not to execute an effect such as holding is determined based on the variation category indicated by the variation category command. In other words, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA1”, “PA2”, or “PA3”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA4” or “PA5”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 70% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PB1” or “PB3”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 60% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PB4” or “PB5”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 80%.

  In each holding / execution effect execution presence / absence determination table, “not executed” and “executed” are determined so that “execution not performed” and “execution performed” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. Each is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform the performance such as holding. For example, in the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a hold or the like that is referred to when “PA1”, “PA2”, or “PA3”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 90%, and “execution present” is 10%. As determined by the ratio, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute such as holding is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution”. In the hold execution execution determination table to be referred to when “PA4” or “PA5”, “no execution” is determined at a ratio of 70%, and “execution present” is determined at a ratio of 30%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution”. In the hold execution execution determination table to be referred to when “PB1” or “PB3”, “No execution” is determined at a rate of 60%, and “Execution” is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution”. In the execution determination table for determining whether or not to hold or the like to be referred to when “PB4” or “PB5”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 20%, and “executed” is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution”. Note that the random number value for determining whether execution such as holding is performed may be updated, for example, in the rendering random number update process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9000, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an effect such as holding based on a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding (step S9001). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 includes numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute an effect such as holding, and a determination value of “no execution” or “execution performed” in the determination table for determining whether or not the execution of holding is performed in step S9000. To determine whether or not to execute an effect such as hold.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9001, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the effect such as holding (step S9002). When it is determined to execute an effect such as a hold (step S9002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of reserved memories (a prize is held) from among a plurality of types of effect patterns determining tables such as a hold stored in the ROM 121. An on-holding effect pattern determination table corresponding to the variable category command and the variable category command is selected and set (step S9003). That is, when the winning control is the first hold (the first hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the first hold in the second start winning memory display area 5HR). An effect pattern determination table for the first hold, etc. is set, and the second prize is held (the second hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold in the second start winning memory display area 5HR) In the case of the second), an effect pattern determination table for the second hold is set, and the third pay is held (the third hold in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start) If the winning memory display area 5HR is the third hold), an effect pattern determination table for the third hold is set, and the fourth winning is the first hold (first start winning memory display error). Hold 4 th in A 5HL, or sets a hold like effect pattern determination table for holding a fourth point when a hold 4 th) in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9003, the CPU 120 for effect control determines an effect pattern such as hold based on a random value for determining an effect pattern such as hold (step S9004). That is, the effect control CPU 120 compares the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the effect pattern such as the hold with the determination value of each effect pattern such as the hold in the hold effect pattern determination table set in step S9003. Then, the one hold etc. production pattern is determined. Then, the effect determination process such as hold is ended. Note that the random number value for determining the effect pattern such as the hold may be updated in the effect random number update process (step S77), for example.

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute an effect such as hold (step S9002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 displays white (when the hold display is added, the display mode after each shift, and the display mode of the active display as white ( A normal display mode is determined (step S9005). Then, the effect determination process such as hold is ended.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern such as hold. FIG. 38A shows an example of an effect pattern such as a hold determined by the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. That is, in the effect determination process for holding or the like executed when the winning is the third holding, when it is determined to execute the effect such as holding (step S9002; YES), the plurality of holdings shown in FIG. One effect pattern such as hold is determined from among the effect patterns (such as hold effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14”).

  In FIG. 38A, the “display mode of the hold display at the third hold position” in the figure is the display mode of the hold display at the position after the additional display and before the first shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position three times before the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold at the position three times before the second start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the second hold position” in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the first shift to before the second shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position two times before the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or the second hold at the position two times before the second start prize memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display. The “display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” in the figure is a display mode of the hold display at the position after the second shift to before the third shift. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display at the position immediately before the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold at the position before the first start winning memory display area 5HR. It is a display mode of display.

  In FIG. 38 (A), for example, an effect pattern “HP1” such as hold indicates white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays white as a hold display at the second hold position, and holds 1 This is an effect pattern such as hold, in which white is displayed as the hold display at the position of the first position, and yellow is displayed as the active display. The production pattern “HP2” such as hold displays white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays white as a hold display at the second hold position, and yellow as a hold display at the first hold position. Is an effect pattern such as hold, in which yellow is displayed as the active display. The production pattern “HP3” such as hold displays white as a hold display at the third hold position, displays yellow as a hold display at the second hold position, and yellow as a hold display at the first hold position. Is an effect pattern such as hold, in which yellow is displayed as the active display. The on-holding effect patterns “HP4” to “HP14” are also as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38A shows an effect pattern such as a hold determined by the hold third effect pattern determination table for the third hold, but the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the first hold. Reservation effect pattern determined by hold, production pattern determination table for hold, etc. determined by hold pattern production table for second hold, etc. Hold effect, etc. determined by hold pattern production table, such as hold for fourth hold The same applies to the pattern.

  For example, the hold etc. production pattern determined by the hold 1st hold etc. production pattern determination table is “the display mode of the hold display at the first hold position” and “the display mode of the hold display of the active display”. It is sufficient if is set. The production pattern for holding, etc. determined by the second holding pattern display table for holding, etc. is “the display mode of the hold display at the second position of the hold” and “the display mode of the hold display at the first position of the hold”. ”And“ display mode of active display hold display ”may be set. The presentation pattern for holding, etc. determined by the fourth holding pattern display table for holding, etc. is “the display mode of the hold display at the fourth position of the hold” and “the display mode of the hold display at the third position of the hold”. ”,“ Display mode of hold display at the second position of hold ”,“ display mode of hold display at the first position of hold ”, and“ display mode of hold display of active display ” That's fine.

  FIG. 38B is an example of a determination ratio of an effect pattern such as a hold by a hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold. According to the example shown in FIG. 38 (B), the determination ratio of the effect pattern such as the hold differs depending on the variation category indicated by the variation category command. It should be noted that, in the hold etc. effect pattern determination table for the third hold, one hold etc. effect pattern among the hold etc. effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” is shown in FIG. ) Are compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. for each of the effect patterns “HP1” to “HP14” for holding, etc., according to the variation category command. It is only necessary that a numerical value (determination value) to be assigned is assigned.

  For example, in the hold etc. production pattern determination table to be referred to when “PA4” or “PA5”, each of the hold etc. production patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is decided at a rate of 23%, and the hold etc. production pattern As each of “HP5” to “HP12” is determined at a rate of 1%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. Need only be assigned. Further, in the hold etc. production pattern determination table to be referred to when it is “PB1” or “PA3”, each of the hold etc. production patterns “HP1” to “HP4” is decided at a rate of 20%. As each of “HP5” to “HP14” is determined at a rate of 2%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern for holding, etc. Need only be assigned.

  It should be noted that the determination ratio of the production pattern such as the hold by the production pattern determination table for the first hold, the determination ratio of the production pattern such as the hold by the production pattern determination table for the second hold, etc. The ratio of determining the production pattern for the hold by the production pattern determination table for the hold, etc. is omitted, but the hold is 3 for both the first hold, the second hold, and the fourth hold. As in the case of the eyes, it is only necessary to determine any effect pattern such as holding.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance zone effect determination process (steps S161A and S164A). FIG. 39A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect determination process. In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 39A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning is the third or fourth prize (step S9010). When it is determined that the winning is not the third or fourth (step S9010; NO), that is, when the winning is the first or second, the chance zone effect determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the winning is the third or fourth (step S9010; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a chance zone effect period (a period during which the chance zone effect is being executed). (Step S9011). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if it has already been set as the use pattern, the set contents (execution timing, etc.) ) And the value of the effect control process timer, it may be determined whether or not it is a chance zone effect period. When it is determined that it is the chance zone effect period (step S9011; YES), the chance zone effect determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is not the chance zone effect period (step S9011; NO), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the chance zone effect (the state that the chance zone effect has been executed but has not been executed yet). ) Is determined (step S9012). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has information (described later) indicating that it is a chance zone effect target in association with any buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). It may be determined whether or not the chance zone effect execution has been determined based on whether or not it has already been stored. If it is determined that the chance zone effect execution has been determined (step S9012; YES), the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  When it is determined that the chance zone effect execution execution has not been determined (step S9012; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines a plurality of types of chance zone effect execution determination tables (chance zones corresponding to the types of variable categories) stored in the ROM 121. A chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table corresponding to the variation category indicated by the variation category command is selected and set from the effect execution presence determination table) (step S9013).

  FIG. 39B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 39B, the execution / non-execution of the chance zone effect is determined based on the variation category indicated by the variation category command. That is, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA1”, “PA2”, or “PA3”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA4” or “PA5”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PB1” or “PB3”, no execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PB4” or “PB5”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%.

  In each chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table, “not executed” and “executed” are determined so that “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined at the ratios shown in FIG. Each is assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. For example, in the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when “PA1”, “PA2”, or “PA3”, “No execution” is determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. Each “executed” is assigned a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when “PA4” or “PA5”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “execution present” is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “not executed” and “executed”. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when “PB1” or “PB3”, “no execution” and “execution present” are respectively determined so that “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to perform chance zone effect is assigned. In the chance zone effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when “PB4” or “PB5”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 80%, and “execution present” is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect is assigned to each of “not executed” and “executed”. Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to perform the chance zone effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance zone effect based on the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the chance zone effect (step S9014). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 includes numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance zone effect execution presence / absence, and a determination value of “no execution” or “execution present” in the chance zone effect execution determination table set in step S9013. To determine whether or not to execute the chance zone effect. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance zone effect, the buffer of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B) that stores hold information of the current winning winning is stored. Information indicating that it is the target of the chance zone effect is stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or second prefetch notice buffer 194D) corresponding to the number. Then, the chance zone effect determination process ends.

  In the chance zone effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, when the winning is not the third or fourth prize (step S9010; NO), the chance zone effect is not executed, but the winning prize is the third or fourth prize. The chance zone effect may be executed even when it is not an eye. For example, when the winning is the first one, the chance zone effect may be started from the target change which is the next change. If there is no winning while the target changes, the chance zone effect may end at the end of the target change. In addition, if there is a win while the target changes, the chance is unconditionally (or only when the expectation of the big hit of the change corresponding to the win is high) until the end of the change corresponding to the win The zone effect may be continued, or the chance zone effect may be ended at the end of the target change, as in the case where there is no winning during the target change.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the predetermined effect process (S180). In the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). When the predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. The value of -1 is decremented by 1 (step S734), and it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined effect timer has become 0 (step S735A). When the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S735A; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes (continues) the operation control of the predetermined effect in the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top. (Step S735B), and the predetermined effect process ends. Specifically, in the process of step S735B, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the predetermined effect as a use pattern, and the display control specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and the Z value (Z value = 2) is transmitted, thereby causing a predetermined effect image corresponding to the predetermined effect (FIGS. 25A and 25B). 26C) is displayed in the third layer from the top (Z value = 2).

  When the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735A; YES), the predetermined effect is ended (step S736), the predetermined effect execution flag is reset (step S737), and the predetermined effect process is ended.

  If the predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S731 (step S731; NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts the normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start). Whether the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or normal symbol variation start designation (lack) command reception flag) indicating that the designation (losing command) has been received is set. It is determined whether or not (step S751). If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is not set (step S751; NO), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state based on the time-short flag. (Step S752). If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S752; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (step S753). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state may be determined, for example, based on the value of the effect process flag. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the game state is a big hit game state when the value of the effect process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state (step S753; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is not the big hit gaming state (step S753; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the decorative symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the decorative design is changing may be determined, for example, based on the value of the effect process flag. If the decorative design is not changing (step S755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one minute or more has elapsed since the change of the decorative design was completed (step S757). For example, a timer may be prepared for measuring the time after the decoration symbol variation ends, and it may be determined whether or not one minute or more has elapsed based on the measured value of the timer. If one minute or more has elapsed (step S757; YES), the predetermined effect process is terminated. If one minute or more has not elapsed (step S757; NO), the process proceeds to step S759.

  Note that the end of the processing when one or more minutes have passed since the change of the decorative design has been taken into consideration that the player continues playing the game for a while after the change of the decorative design is completed. Because. In addition, the one minute is slightly longer than the time (12 seconds × 4) based on the normal symbol fluctuation time in the low base state (12 seconds) and the upper limit value 4 of the number of stored gate passages (ordinary symbol holding number). This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759 until the time (60 seconds) elapses.

  When the decorative symbol is changing (step S755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and the type (step S759). In the process of step S759, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a plurality of types of predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination tables stored in the ROM 121 (predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to when per ordinary symbol, normal symbols, etc. One of the predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when lost is selected and set, and the predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table set, and a random number for determining the presence / absence of predetermined effect execution (not shown) ) Is used to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined effect.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a predetermined effect. In FIG. 41, execution of a predetermined effect (notification “×”) is to execute a predetermined effect that displays “×”. The execution of the predetermined effect (notification “◯”) is to execute the predetermined effect that displays “◯”. The execution of the predetermined effect (notification “×” → “◯”) is to execute the predetermined effect that displays “◯” after the display of “×”. “No execution of predetermined effect” means that the predetermined effect is not executed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 41, the normal symbol display result (per normal symbol indicated by the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol loss indicated by the normal symbol variation start designation (lack) command) is displayed. On the basis of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed (notification “×”), the predetermined effect is executed (notification “◯”), the predetermined effect is executed (notification “×” → “◯”), and the predetermined effect is not executed. The More specifically, when the normal symbol change is set (that is, when the normal symbol change start designation (hit) command reception flag is set by receiving the normal symbol change start designation (hit) command), the predetermined effect is executed ( Notification “×”) is determined at a rate of 0%, predetermined performance execution presence (notification “◯”) is determined at a rate of 20%, and predetermined performance execution enabled (notification “×” → “◯”) is 20%. The predetermined performance execution absence is determined at a rate of 70%. When normal symbol is lost (that is, when the normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag is set by receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command), the predetermined effect is executed (notification “×”). Is determined at a rate of 10%, predetermined performance execution presence (notification “◯”) is determined at a rate of 0%, and predetermined performance execution presence (notification “×” → “◯”) is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of the predetermined effect is determined at a rate of 90%.

  Each predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table includes predetermined effect execution existence (notification “×”), predetermined effect execution existence (notification “◯”), predetermined effect execution existence (notification “×” → “◯”), predetermined As shown in FIG. 41, each of the executions without production is determined to have a predetermined production execution (notification “×”), a predetermined production execution is performed (notification “◯”), and a predetermined production execution is performed (notification “×”). ”→“ ◯ ”), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect is assigned to each of the executions of the predetermined effect. For example, in the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, which is referred to when a normal symbol is used, for example, “predetermined execution” (notification “×”) is determined at a rate of 0%, and predetermined execution is performed (notification “◯”). Is determined at a rate of 20%, predetermined performance is performed (notification “×” → “◯”) is determined at a rate of 20%, and predetermined performance is not performed at a rate of 70%. For determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, whether it is executed (notification “×”), execution of a predetermined effect (notification “◯”), execution of a predetermined effect (notification “×” → “◯”), or no execution of a predetermined effect. A numerical value to be compared with a random value (not shown) is assigned. In the determination table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, which is referred to when an ordinary symbol is lost, the predetermined effect execution presence (notification “×”) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the predetermined effect execution presence (notification “◯”) is 0. % Is determined, predetermined performance execution is performed (notification “×” → “◯”) is determined at a rate of 0%, and predetermined performance execution is not performed at a rate of 90%. (Notification “×”), execution of a predetermined effect (notification “◯”), execution of a predetermined effect (notification “×” → “◯”), no execution of a predetermined effect, etc. A number that is compared with the number is assigned. The random value for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect may be updated in, for example, an effect random number update process (step S77).

  Further, when executing the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 receives a normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or a normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag). ) Is reset. Also, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag even when the process of step S759 is not executed due to the determination of “YES” in steps S752, S753, and S755.

  Subsequent to the process of step S759, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined effect by the process of step S759 (step S764). If it is not determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; NO), the predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect (step S764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect timer. (Step S778), a predetermined effect is started (Step S779). Note that the processes in steps S778 and S779 are processes for starting a predetermined effect timer and controlling the effect device such as the image display device 5 in accordance with the contents of the process data (the same processing as steps S535 and S536 in FIG. 42). is there. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined effect execution flag (step S780), and ends the predetermined effect process.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is “lost” by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. Is determined (step S522). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is a first variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is “lost”. If there is, it is determined to be “lost”. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display result notification command received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 is the second variable display result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is a 16R probability change big hit or variable display. When the result is the third variable display result notification command for notifying that the result is 8R probability variation big hit, it is determined that it is not “lost”.

  When it is determined in step S522 that it is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data specified by, for example, reading the EXT data in the change pattern specifying command transmitted from the main board 11. The pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach (loss)” (that is, “PA 1-1”, “PA 2-1”, “PA 2-2” in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the reach combination (step S525). . As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value ( For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol, so that the confirmed decorative symbol does not become a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that it is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when it is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 is a definite decoration constituting a big hit combination. A combination of symbols (final stop symbols) is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined.

  When determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit), whether or not there is a promotion effect, and the like. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probability variation jackpot (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative symbols arranged in parallel) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probability variation jackpot (for example, an even number of identical ornamental symbols represent In the mode of 3), in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, either the big hit combination dedicated to 16R probability variation big hit or the big hit combination dedicated to 8R probability variation big hit may be determined as the fixed decorative design. . At this time, when the big hit combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable big hit is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol, it is only necessary to notify the player that the 16R probability big hit is made until the end of the 8th round as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, it is only necessary to determine whether it is a big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit as a definite decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash accuracy) is provided, a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit (crash accuracy) is used. You may decide.

  After performing any of the processes of step S524, step S525, and step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change is a chance zone change (step S529A). . For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is a chance zone effect target in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a chance zone change may be determined based on whether or not the change is made.

  When it is determined in step S529A that the change is a chance zone change (step S529A; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect as a use pattern (step S529B). . In other words, when it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed in the chance zone effect determination process (FIG. 39) executed at the time of winning, and information indicating that it is the target is stored (step S9014), it is executed first thereafter. In the variable display start setting process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect is set as a use pattern. Thus, when the chance zone effect is executed at the time of winning a prize, the chance zone effect is started from the next change (change first started after the winning).

  If it is determined in step S529A that the change is not a chance zone change (step S529A; NO), or after the process of step S529B is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a step-up notice effect determination process (step S529A). S530A). In the step-up notice effect determining process, whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect (one aspect of the main notice effect) is determined, and when it is determined to execute the step-up notice effect, a step-up notice effect pattern is determined.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a main notice effect (step-up notice effect, group notice effect, etc.). FIG. 43A is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect. 43A (the same applies to FIGS. 43B and 43C), the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X” represents the fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PA3-X”. "Represents the variation patterns" PA3-1 "to" PA3-2 ", the variation pattern" PA4-X "represents the variation patterns" PA4-1 "to" PA4-3 ", and the variation pattern" PA5-X " "Represents the variation patterns" PA5-1 "to" PA5-3 ", the variation pattern" PB3-X "represents the variation patterns" PB3-1 "to" PB3-2 ", and the variation pattern" PB4-X " "Represents the variation patterns" PB4-1 "to" PB4-3 ", and the variation pattern" PB5-X "represents the variation patterns" PB5-1 "to" PB5-3 ".

  According to the example shown in FIG. 43A, whether or not the step-up notice effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. That is, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “no execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 95% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the fluctuation pattern is “PA3-X”, when the fluctuation pattern is “PB3-X”, when the fluctuation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, or when the fluctuation pattern is “PB4-X” or The case of “PB5-X” is also as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, when determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3- X, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”) Store in the ROM 121.

  In each of the above-described step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined in the ratio of FIG. The numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect should be assigned to each of “. For example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “No execution” and “No execution” are determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect needs to be assigned to each of “executed”. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, “not executed” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “executed” is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute a step-up notice effect needs to be assigned to each of “not executed” and “executed”. Note that the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  FIG. 43B is an example of the determination ratio of the step-up notice effect pattern. In FIG. 43B, a step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes a step-up notice effect (SU1). The step-up notice effect (SU1) is an effect of displaying the frame image G11 (FIG. 27E) as the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU2). The step-up notice effect (SU2) is an effect of displaying the frame image G12 (FIG. 27E) as the second step following the first step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU3). The step-up notice effect (SU3) is an effect of displaying the frame image G13 (FIG. 27E) as a third step following the first step and the second step in the display area of the image display device 5. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU4). The step-up notice effect (SU4) is an effect of displaying the frame image G14 (FIG. 27E) as the fourth step following the first step, the second step, and the third step in the display area of the image display device 5. is there. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-5 (SU5)” is a step-up notice effect pattern that executes the step-up notice effect (SU5). In the step-up notice effect (SU5), the frame image G15 (FIG. 27E) is used as the fifth step following the first step, the second step, the third step, and the fourth step in the display area of the image display device 5. It is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 43 (B), the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”, “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4- A step-up notice effect pattern is determined based on “X” or “PB5-X”). That is, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is determined. It is determined at a rate of 15%. When the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-2 (SU2)” is 30%. The step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-3 (SU3)” is decided at a rate of 20%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-4 (SU4)” is decided at a rate of 10%. .

  The variation pattern “PB3-X”, the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, and the variation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X” are also shown in FIG. Since it is as it is, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  43B, when determining the step-up notice effect pattern, for example, a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X” , “PB3-X”, “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”) are stored in the ROM 121 with a plurality of types of step-up notice effect pattern determination tables. To do.

  In each of the above step-up notice effect pattern determination tables, the step-up notice effect pattern is determined for each of the step-up notice effect patterns so that each of the step-up notice effect patterns is determined at the ratio of FIG. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value for pattern determination (not shown). For example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA2-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 85%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1” is determined. -2 (SU2) "is determined at a rate of 15%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern for each of the step-up notice effect patterns. Need only be assigned. Further, for example, in the step-up notice effect pattern determination table for the variation pattern “PA3-X”, the step-up notice effect pattern “SYP1-1 (SU1)” is determined at a rate of 40%, and the step-up notice effect pattern “ "SYP1-2 (SU2)" is determined at a rate of 30%, step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-3 (SU3)" is determined at a rate of 20%, and step-up notice effect pattern "SYP1-4 (SU4)" ”Is determined at a rate of 10%, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the step-up notice effect pattern is assigned to each of the step-up notice effect patterns. That's fine. The random value for determining the step-up notice effect pattern may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first responds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) the step-up notice effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not step-up notice effect execution is performed, and “no execution” or “execute” in the set step-up notice effect execution determination table The presence / absence of execution of the step-up notice effect is determined by comparing with a determination value of “Yes”. When it is determined to execute the step-up notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets (selects) a step-up notice effect pattern determination table corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and steps up. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the notice effect pattern with the judgment value of each step up notice effect pattern in the set step up notice effect pattern determination table, one step up notice effect pattern is obtained. decide.

  After performing the step-up notice effect determining process in step S530A, the group notice effect determining process is executed (step S530B). In the group notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute the group notice effect (one aspect of the main notice effect) is determined.

  FIG. 43C is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 43C, whether or not the group notice effect is executed is determined based on the variation pattern. Specifically, when the variation pattern is “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, when the variation pattern is “PA2-X”, when the variation pattern is “PA3-X”, When it is “PB3-X”, the non-execution is determined at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 95%, and execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%. When the variation pattern is “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”, execution non-execution is determined at a rate of 80% and execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%.

  When determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect as shown in FIG. 43 (C), for example, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X” ”,“ PB3-X ”,“ PA4-X ”or“ PA5-X ”,“ PB4-X ”or“ PB5-X ”), a plurality of types of group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table in the ROM 121 Remember.

  In each of the above-described group notice effect execution presence / absence determination tables, “execution not performed” and “execution present” are determined in the ratio of FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect needs to be assigned to each. For example, in the group announcement effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA1-1” or “PB1-1”, “No execution” and “Execution” are determined so that “No execution” is determined at a rate of 100%. It is only necessary to assign a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect to each “present”. Further, for example, in the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the variation pattern “PA4-X” or “PA5-X”, “not executed” is determined at a rate of 95%, and “executed” is set at a rate of 5%. It is sufficient that a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect is assigned to each of “no execution” and “execution” as determined by . Note that the random value for determining whether or not to execute the group notice effect may be updated, for example, in the effect random number update process (step S77).

  That is, in the group notice effect determination process (step S530B) of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the group according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Set (select) a notice effect execution presence / absence determination table, and determine whether the group notice effect execution presence / absence determination table is set to “no execution” or “execution”. The presence / absence of execution of the group notice effect is determined by comparing the value.

  After executing the group notice effect determination process in step S530B, the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold digest process (step S531). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) operation control for shifting the hold display in the eighth layer (Z value = 7) from the top. More specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts changing the decorative symbol in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game). ), The hold display or the active display after the shift based on the effect pattern (eg, the content stored in step S160B) determined in the effect determination process (step S160A) of the hold effect determination process (step S150) An effect control pattern corresponding to the display mode is set as a use pattern, and a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The hold table after the shift determined in the effect determination process such as hold by transmitting a value (Z value = 7), etc. Pending such as a display image corresponding to and activate the display of the display mode (FIG. 25 (A), the FIG. 25 (B), FIG. 27 (B)) is displayed in the 8 th layer from the upper (Z value = 7). The same applies to the case where the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the second special symbol game).

  After executing the pending digest process in step S531, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation as a use pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Thereby, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach β, the effect control pattern including the movable accessory control data for operating the movable accessory 17 is set as the usage pattern. . Further, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be executed in the step-up notice effect determination process (step S530A), the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern. If it is determined in the group notice effect determination process (step S530B) that the group notice effect is to be executed, an effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as a use pattern.

  After executing the process of step S532, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer. (Step S535), the rendering device such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (Step S536).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

  After executing the process of step S537, the CPU 120 for effect control digests the command stored in the first start prize receiving command buffer 194A or the second start prize receiving command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) is deleted, and the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted is set in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. Each command stored in the corresponding area is shifted while maintaining the winning order. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special game, the effect control CPU 120 starts with the smallest buffer number (in the commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B). The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) is deleted, and in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command to be deleted Each command stored in is shifted while maintaining the winning order. Also, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 stores information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like according to the deletion or shift of the command. Deletions and shifts are also performed. Also, in the process of step S538, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores a command to be deleted (such as a design symbol designation command, a variation category command, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  Subsequent to the process of step S538, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” that is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and ends the variable display start setting process. .

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process (step S172). FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect operation control process. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a group notice effect operation control process. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect execution notification operation control process.

  In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the variable time timer value by 1 (step S540) and determines whether or not the variable time timer value has become 0 (step S541). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable time timer has timed out. When the variation time timer value becomes 0 (step S541; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S548). ), The variable display effect process is terminated.

  When the variation time timer value is not 0 (step S541; NO), the production control CPU 120 executes the motion control (variable display) of the decorative symbols in the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top ( Start and continue) (step S542). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). In addition to transmitting to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and transmitting the Z value (Z value = 11), the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed in the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top. Variable display.

  After executing the process of step S542, a chance zone effect operation control process is executed (step S543).

  FIG. 45A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the chance zone effect operation control process (step S543). In the chance zone effect operation control process shown in FIG. 45A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the change is a chance zone change (step S9020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has already stored information indicating that it is a chance zone effect target in association with one of the buffer numbers of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C (or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D). Whether or not the change is a chance zone change may be determined based on whether or not the change is made. If it is determined that the change is not a chance zone change (step S9020; NO), the chance zone effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the change is a change in the chance zone (step S9020; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the chance zone effect in the tenth layer (Z value = 9) from the top ( Start and continue) (step S9021). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the chance zone effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and a Z value (Z value = 9) is transmitted, for example, to obtain a chance zone effect image corresponding to the chance zone effect (FIG. 25A, FIG. 25). B) and FIG. 27 (D)) are displayed in the tenth layer (Z value = 9) from the top.

  When the chance zone effect is determined (step S9014) in the chance zone effect determination process (see FIG. 39A), it is determined that the chance zone effect is to be executed. (For example, count value “1” when it is the first hold, for example, count value “2” when it is the second hold, and hold 3) For example, a count value “3” may be set for the first time, and a count value “4” may be set for the fourth time, for example, and the chance zone continuation counter may be decremented by 1 for each shift. The chance zone continuation counter may be provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  As described above, when the chance zone continuation counter is used, in the process of step S9020, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a chance zone fluctuation based on the value of the chance zone continuation counter. May be.

  After performing the chance zone effect operation control process in step S543, a step-up notice effect operation control process is executed (step S544).

  FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing an example of the step-up notice effect operation control process (step S544). In the step-up notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 45B, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a step-up notice effect period (a period during which the step-up notice effect is executed) (step). S9030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is already set as the use pattern, and if it is already set as the use pattern, the set content (execution) It may be determined whether or not it is a step-up notice effect period based on the timing and the value of the effect control process timer. If it is determined that it is not the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the step-up notice effect period (step S9030; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes (starts) the operation control of the step-up notice effect in the eleventh layer (Z value = 10) from the top. , Continue) (step S9031). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). Step-up notice effect images (SU1 to SU5) corresponding to step-up notice effects (SU1 to SU5) are transmitted by transmitting a control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and transmitting a Z value (Z value = 10). 25 (A), FIG. 25 (B), and FIG. 27 (E)) are displayed in the eleventh layer (Z value = 10) from the top.

  After performing the process of step S9031, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the SU5 execution flag indicating that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed is on (step S9032). The SU5 execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the SU5 execution flag is on (step S9032; YES), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the SU5 execution flag is not on (step S9032; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed (step S9033). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the step-up notice effect pattern is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), or when it is set as the use pattern. May determine whether or not the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed based on the set contents (execution timing of SU5, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. If the step-up notice effect (SU5) has not been executed (step S9033; NO), the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated. When the step-up notice effect (SU5) is executed (step S9033; YES), the SU5 execution flag is set to the on state (step S9034), and the step-up notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  After performing the step-up notice effect operation control process in step S544, the group notice effect action control process is executed (step S545).

  FIG. 46A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the group notice effect operation control process (step S545). In the group notice effect operation control process shown in FIG. 46A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the group notice effect period (period in which the group notice effect is executed) (step S9040). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171), and sets it when the use pattern is set. It may be determined whether or not it is the group notice effect period based on the contents (execution timing of the group notice effect, etc.) and the value of the effect control process timer. If it is determined that it is not the group notice effect period (step S9040; NO), the group notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the group notice effect period (step S9040; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the group notice effect in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top (start, continue). (Step S9041). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). Is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the Z value (Z value = 8) is transmitted, for example, so that the group notice effect image corresponding to the group notice effect (FIG. 25A, FIG. B) and FIG. 27C) are displayed in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top.

  After executing the process of step S9041, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the group notice effect execution flag indicating that the group notice effect has been executed is on (step S9042). The group notice effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the group notice effect execution flag is on (step S9042; YES), the group notice effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the group notice effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the group notice effect execution flag to the on state (step S9043), and ends the group notice effect operation control process.

  After performing the group notice effect operation control process of step S545, the accessory operation control process is executed (step S546).

  FIG. 46B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the accessory operation control process (step S546). In the accessory action control process shown in FIG. 46B, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the accessory action period (period in which the movable accessory 17 is operated) (step S9050). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171). If it is set as a usage pattern, whether or not it is a group notice production period based on the set contents (such as the operation timing of the movable accessory 17) and the value of the production control process timer. You may judge. When it is determined that it is not the accessory operation period (step S9050; NO), the accessory operation control process is terminated.

  When it is determined that it is the accessory operation period (step S9050; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the movable accessory 17 (step S9051). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control includes the movable combination included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (the variation pattern of the super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). The movable accessory 17 is operated by transmitting a control command specified by the object control data to the accessory control board 16.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9051, the CPU 120 for effect control executes (starts and continues) the operation control of the effect effect effect in the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top (step S9052). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect control pattern (an effect effect effect corresponding to the change pattern (the change pattern of the super reach β) set as the use pattern in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). The display control command specified by the display control data included in the display control data to be executed) is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 and the Z value (Z value = 6) is transmitted. The effect effect effect image corresponding to the effect effect effect (see FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, and FIG. 27A) is displayed in the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top.

  After executing the process of step S9052, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the accessory effect execution flag indicating that the operation control of the accessory is performed is on (step S9053). The accessory effect execution flag may be provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. If the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9053; YES), the accessory operation control process is terminated.

  When the accessory effect execution flag is not in the on state (step S9053; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accessory effect execution flag to the on state (step S9054), and ends the accessory operation control process.

  After performing the accessory operation control process of step S546, an effect execution notification operation control process is executed (step S547).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547). In the effect execution notification operation control process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the notification period of execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060). For example, the effect control CPU 120 is set if the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) has already been set as the use pattern, or if it has already been set as the use pattern. Whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) may be determined based on the contents (notification timing and the like) and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the step-up notice effect (SU5) (step S9060; NO), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the step-up notice effect (SU5) has been executed. It is determined whether or not is in an on state (step S9061). When the SU5 execution flag is in the on state (step S9061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the SU5 execution flag to the off state (step S9062).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9060; YES), or after the processing of step S9062 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer according to the notification number and the notification start order (Z value = 3-5) execute (start, continue) the operation control of the execution notification of SU5 (step S9063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 as a use pattern, and performs display control of a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. And transmitting the Z value (Z value = 5 in the first case, Z value = 4 in the second case, Z value = 3 in the third case), etc. Thus, a layer (in accordance with the number of notifications and the order of notification start (see FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, FIG. 26D to FIG. 26G) of the effect execution notification images corresponding to the execution notification of SU5. Display with Z value = 3-5).

  When the SU5 execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9061; NO), or after executing the process of step S9063, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect ( Step S9064). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the use pattern has already been set, the set content ( It may be determined whether or not it is a notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect based on the notification timing and the value of the effect control process timer.

  When it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the group notice effect (step S9064; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group notice effect execution flag indicating that the group notice effect has been executed is on. Is determined (step S9065). When the group notice effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9065; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the group notice effect execution flag to the off state (step S9066).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of execution notification of the group notice effect (step S9064; YES), or after executing the processing of step S9066, the effect control CPU 120 determines the layer (Z according to the notification number and notification start order). The control of the group notice effect execution notification is executed (started, continued) at a value = 3 to 5) (step S9067). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect as a use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The Z value (Z value = 5 in the first case, Z value = 4 in the second case, Z value = 3 in the third case, and Z value = 3 in the third case) is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. As a result, the effect execution notification images (see FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, and FIG. 26D to FIG. 26G) corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect are displayed in the order of the number of notifications and notification start. The corresponding layer (Z value = 3 to 5) is displayed.

  When the group notice effect execution flag is not in the ON state (step S9065; NO), or after executing the process of step S9067, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect. (Step S9068). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect has already been set as the use pattern, and if the use pattern has already been set, the set content ( It may be determined whether or not it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect based on the notification timing and the value of the effect control process timer.

  If it is determined that it is not the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect (step S9068; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory effect execution flag is in the on state (step S9069). If the accessory effect execution flag is not on (step S9069; NO), the effect execution notification operation control process is terminated. When the accessory effect execution flag is on (step S9069; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the accessory effect execution flag to the off state (step S9070).

  When it is determined that it is the notification period of the execution notification of the accessory effect (step S9068; YES), or after executing the processing of step S9070, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the layer (Z The operation control of the execution notification of the accessory effect is executed (start, continuation) at a value = 3 to 5) (step S9071). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the effect effect as the use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The Z value (Z value = 5 in the first case, Z value = 4 in the second case, Z value = 3 in the third case, and Z value = 3 in the third case) is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. As a result, the effect execution notification images (see FIG. 25A, FIG. 25B, FIG. 26D to FIG. 26G) corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect are displayed in the order of the number of notifications and notification start. The corresponding layer (Z value = 3 to 5) is displayed. Then, the effect execution notification operation control process ends.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure waiting process (step S173). In the special symbol waiting process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the post-design stop flag is on (step S720). The post-design stop flag is provided, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. The post-design stop flag is set to the on state by the process of step S723 in response to the reception of the design confirmation designation command.

  When the flag after symbol stop is OFF in step S720 (step S720; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S721). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has not been received (step S721; NO), the effect control CPU 120 is the twelfth layer from the top (step S542 of the variable display effect processing (see FIG. 44)). With Z value = 11), the decorative symbol motion control (variable display) is executed (continued) (step S722). Then, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When it is determined that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S721; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol stop flag on state (step S723), and the second layer from the top (Z With the value = 1), the decorative symbol movement control (stop display) is executed (started) (step S724). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the confirmed decorative pattern determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42) as a use pattern, and is included in the set effect control pattern. The display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 and the Z value (Z value = 1) is transmitted, so that the confirmed decorative design is displayed in the second layer from the top. Stop display at (Z value = 1). Then, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When the flag after symbol stop is on in step S720 (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not two seconds have elapsed from the stop display (step S725). For example, in the process of stopping and displaying the decorative design (in the process of step S724), a timer after stop display with an initial value of 2 seconds is set, and in the process of step S725, whether the timer after stop display has timed out or not is determined. Can be determined. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, it may be determined whether or not two seconds have elapsed since the stop display, or two seconds after the symbol confirmation designation command is received. It may be determined whether or not elapses.

  If two seconds have not elapsed since the stop display in step S725 (step S725; NO), the process proceeds to step S724. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes (continues) the decorative symbol operation control (stop display) in the second layer from the top (Z value = 1), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

  When two seconds have elapsed from the stop display in step S725 (step S725; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs decorative pattern operation control (stop display) on the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top. Execute (start) (step S726). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the confirmed decorative pattern determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42) as a use pattern, and is included in the set effect control pattern. The display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the Z value (Z value = 11) is transmitted. Stop display at (Z value = 11).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S726, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S727). When the confirmed decorative symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S727: NO), the effect control CPU 120 clears the symbol after symbol stop to turn it off (step S728), and sets the value of the effect process flag to the variable display start waiting process. The corresponding value is updated to “0” (step S729), and the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S727: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S730; NO), the special hit waiting process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the symbol stop flag and turns it off (step S731), and sets the fanfare effect (step S731). In step S732, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the big hit start process (step S733), and the special figure waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 49A to 49E show the display operations arranged in time series. In FIG. 49A and the like, an arrow “↓” shown in the display area of the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  FIG. 49A shows a decorative pattern (left symbol “4”, middle symbol “1”, right symbol “6”) corresponding to an active display M0 (not shown) corresponding to the hold display immediately before the hold display M1. ) Indicates a scene that is stopped. In FIG. 49A, it is assumed that the decorative symbol has passed 2 seconds after the stop display. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (A), the decorative pattern during the stop display (after two seconds have elapsed after the stop display) and the first hold display image G5 (hold display M1, M2) are displayed. , M3) and other display images such as hold are displayed.

  The decorative symbol during the stop display (after 2 seconds after the stop display has elapsed) is displayed in the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top in step S726 in the waiting process per special figure (see FIG. 48). . The display image such as the hold is the eighth layer (Z value) from the top in step S162 (or step S165) of the winning effect determination process (see FIG. 36) or the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). = 7).

  It is assumed that the hold display M3 is additionally displayed based on the first start winning that occurred during variable display corresponding to the active display M0 (not shown) (step S162 of the effect determination process at the time of winning). Further, when the hold display M3 is additionally displayed, execution of the chance zone effect targeting the hold display M3 is determined in the chance zone effect determination process (step S161A) (step of the chance zone effect determination process). S9014).

  FIG. 49 (B) shows a scene where the decorative display variable display corresponding to the active display M1 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (B), there are a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3), an active display image G7 (active display M1), and And a chance zone effect image including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10.

  The decorative symbols that are variably displayed are displayed in the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top in step S722 of the special symbol waiting process (see FIG. 48). The chance zone effect image is displayed in the tenth layer (Z value = 9) from the top in step S9021 of the chance zone effect operation control process (see FIG. 45A).

  It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the active display M1 is a variation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a variation pattern of the super reach β). In addition, when variable display is started, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU4) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42).

  FIG. 49 (C) shows a scene following FIG. 49 (B). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (C), there are a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3), an active display image G7 (active display M1), and Is displayed, a chance zone effect image including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, and a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G14. In FIG. 49C, characters and the like are displayed as SU4 in the frame image G14, but are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 49D to 49E.

  The step-up notice effect image is displayed in the eleventh layer (Z value = 10) from the top in step S9031 of the step-up notice effect operation control process (see FIG. 45B).

  FIG. 49 (D) shows a scene following FIG. 49 (C). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (D), there are a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3), an active display image G7 (active display M1), and Display image including hold, a chance zone effect image including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G14, a group notice effect image including a character image G8, and a group notice effect An effect execution notification image including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification is displayed.

  The group notice effect image is displayed in the ninth layer (Z value = 8) from the top in step S9041 of the group notice effect operation control process (see FIG. 46A). The effect execution notification image including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of the group announcement effect is the sixth layer from the top (Z value = 5) in step S9067 of the effect execution notification operation control process (see FIG. 47). Is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (E) shows a scene following FIG. 49 (D). In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (E), there are a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M2, M3), an active display image G7 (active display M1), and Display image including hold, a chance zone effect image including a character image G9 and a pictogram image G10, a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G14, a group notice effect image including a character image G8, and a group notice effect An effect execution notification image including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to an execution notification of an effect, an effect effect effect image including an effect image G4, and an effect execution notification including a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the execution notification of an effect effect The image is displayed. In FIG. 49 (E), the moved (lowered) movable accessory 17 is not shown. The same applies to FIG. 50F described later.

  The effect effect effect image is displayed in the seventh layer (Z value = 6) from the top in step S9052 of the accessory operation control process (see FIG. 46B). The effect execution notification image including the pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect is the fifth layer from the top (Z value = 4) in step S9071 of the effect execution notification operation control process (see FIG. 47). Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, an image having a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image having a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. 50A to 50F show the display operations arranged in time series.

  FIG. 50A shows a decorative pattern (left symbol “2”, middle symbol “8”, right symbol “8”) corresponding to an active display M20 (not shown) corresponding to the previous hold display of the hold display M21. ) Indicates a scene that is stopped. In FIG. 50A, it is assumed that the decorative symbol has passed 2 seconds after the stop display. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50 (A), a decorative pattern image during stop display (after two seconds have elapsed after stop display) and a first hold display image G5 (hold display M21, A display image such as a hold including M22) is displayed.

  FIG. 50 (B) shows a scene where the decorative display corresponding to the active display M21 is variably displayed. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50B includes a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active display image G7 (active display M21). A display image such as hold is displayed.

  It is assumed that the variation pattern corresponding to the active display M21 is a variation pattern accompanying the operation of the movable accessory 17 (a variation pattern of the super reach β). Further, when variable display is started, it is assumed that execution of the step-up notice effect (SU5) and execution of the group notice effect are determined in the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42).

  FIG. 50C shows a scene following FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50C includes a decorative design during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active display image G7 (active display M21). An on-hold display image, a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G15, and an effect execution notification image including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 are displayed. In FIG. 50C, a character or the like is displayed as SU5 in the frame image G15, but it is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 50D to 50F. In FIG. 50 (C), the decorative design being variably displayed can be seen in the region other than the frame image G15, but is not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 50D to 50F.

  The effect execution notification image including the pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is displayed in the sixth layer (Z value = 5) from the top in step S9063 of the effect execution notification operation control process (see FIG. 47). Is done.

  FIG. 50D illustrates a scene following FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50 (D) includes a decorative design during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active display image G7 (active display M21). A hold-up display image, a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G15, an effect execution notice image including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notice of SU5, a group notice effect image including a character image G8, and a group An effect execution notification image including a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the notification notification of the notice effect is displayed.

  The effect execution notification image including the pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect is the fifth layer from the top (Z value = 4) in step S9067 of the effect execution notification operation control process (see FIG. 47). Is displayed.

  FIG. 50E shows a scene following FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50 (E) includes a decorative pattern during variable display, a first hold display image G5 (hold display M22), and an active display image G7 (active display M21). A hold-up display image, a step-up notice effect image including a frame image G15, an effect execution notice image including a pictogram image G3-1 corresponding to the execution notice of SU5, a group notice effect image including a character image G8, and a group An effect including an effect execution informing image including a pictogram image G3-2 corresponding to an execution notification of a notice effect, an effect effect effect image including an effect image G4, and an effect including a pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to the execution notification of an effect effect An execution notification image is displayed.

  The effect execution notification image including the pictogram image G3-3 corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect is the fourth layer from the top (Z value = 3) in step S9071 of the effect execution notification operation control process (see FIG. 47). Is displayed.

  FIG. 50F shows a scene where a magnetic abnormality has occurred in the state of FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50 (F), an error notification image including a pictogram image G1 and a character image G2 is displayed in addition to each screen of FIG. 50 (E).

  The error notification image is displayed in the highest layer (Z value = 0) in step S143 of the error notification process (see FIG. 34).

  As shown in FIG. 50, an image having a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image having a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. 51A to 51E show the display operations arranged in time series. In the example shown in FIG. 51, it is assumed that the decorative symbol is stopped before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (that is, the symbol confirmation designation command is received after the decorative symbol is stopped), and the symbol confirmation is confirmed. It is assumed that the Z value of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed is switched from 1 to 11 when two seconds have elapsed from the reception of the designated command.

  FIG. 51 (A) shows a scene in which the decorative display variable display corresponding to the active display M31 is being performed. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 51 (A), a decorative pattern being variably displayed, a hold display image including an active display image G7 (active display M31), a roulette table image G16, and a predetermined image are displayed. A predetermined effect image including the effect image G17 is displayed. As described above, the black arrow “↓” of the image G17 in FIG. 52A represents that the predetermined effect design is changing (a state where “◯”, “x”, etc. are scrolling). The same applies to FIG. 52 (B).

  The decorative symbols that are variably displayed are displayed in the twelfth layer (Z value = 11) from the top in step S722 of the special symbol waiting process (see FIG. 48). The display image such as the hold is the eighth layer (Z value) from the top in step S162 (or step S165) of the winning effect determination process (see FIG. 36) or the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 42). = 7). The predetermined effect image is displayed in the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top in step S735B of the predetermined effect process (see FIG. 40).

  FIG. 51B shows a scene following FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 51 (B) includes a decorative symbol during variable display (however, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed) and an active display image G7 (active display M31). A display image such as a hold display, and a predetermined effect image including an image G16 of a roulette stand and an image G17 of a predetermined effect symbol are displayed. In FIG. 51B, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, but before the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S721; NO), the predetermined effect image is the twelfth layer from the top. (Z value = 11) is displayed (step S722).

  FIG. 51C shows a scene following FIG. The display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 51 (C) includes a decorative pattern (before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command) that is being stopped, a roulette stand image G16, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect symbol. A predetermined effect image is displayed. In FIG. 51C, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, but before the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step S721; NO), the predetermined effect image is the twelfth layer (Z value) from the top. = 11) (step S722).

  FIG. 51D shows a scene following FIG. Specifically, this is a scene when a symbol confirmation designation command is received. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 51 (D), there are a decorative symbol during the stop display (two seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command), a roulette table image G16, and a predetermined effect symbol image G17. And a predetermined effect image including these are displayed.

  After receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (two seconds after reception), the decorative symbol that is being stopped is displayed in the second layer (Z value = 1) from the top in step S724 in the special symbol waiting process (see FIG. 48). Is displayed.

  FIG. 51E illustrates a scene following FIG. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 51 (E), a decorative pattern that is being stopped (after two seconds have elapsed after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command), a roulette table image G16, and a predetermined effect are displayed. A predetermined effect image including the design image G17 is displayed.

  After receiving the symbol confirmation designation command (after 2 seconds have elapsed since the reception), the decorative symbol that is being stopped is displayed as the 12th layer (Z value) from the top in the waiting process per special symbol (see FIG. 48) step S726. = 11).

  As shown in FIG. 51, an image with a small Z value is displayed on the front layer, and an image with a large Z value is displayed on the back layer.

  As described above, the example shown in FIG. 51 shows an example of the display operation in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. However, the decoration operation is performed after the symbol confirmation designation command is received. In the case of the mode in which the symbols are stopped and displayed, the display of FIG. 51C is not performed (that is, the display of FIG. 51D follows the FIG. 51B).

  Hereinafter, another example of the predetermined effect process will be described. The predetermined effect shown in FIG. 40 is to execute a notice regarding a normal symbol (notice whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is controlled to be in an expanded and open state). It is also possible to execute a notice regarding symbols (notice whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing another example of the predetermined effect process. In the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first predetermined effect process (step S181), executes the second predetermined effect process (step S182), and ends the predetermined effect process. . The first predetermined effect is an effect for executing a notice regarding a normal symbol. The second predetermined effect is an effect for executing a notice regarding the decorative design. In the first predetermined effect process, it is determined whether or not to execute the first predetermined effect. In the second predetermined effect process, it is determined whether or not to execute the second predetermined effect.

  53 to 55 are flowcharts showing an example of the first predetermined effect process. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the second predetermined effect process.

  In the first predetermined effect process of step S181 shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set. (Step S1731). If the first predetermined effect in-progress flag is not set (step S1731; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second predetermined effect in-progress flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S1732A).

  The setting and resetting of the second predetermined effect execution flag will be described. Whether the second predetermined effect determination flag (set in step S813 to be described later) is set when the effect control CPU 120 does not make a big hit in the special figure waiting process (FIG. 48) (step S727; NO). If the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, 1 is subtracted from the first variation counter (a value is set in step S814 described later), and the first variation after subtraction is performed. When the value of the number counter becomes 0, the second predetermined effect executing flag may be set. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the second predetermined effect determination flag when the second predetermined effect executing flag is set.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set in the variable display effect processing (FIG. 44), and when the second predetermined effect executing flag is set. May reset the second predetermined effect execution flag when the execution of the second predetermined effect ends.

  When the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S1732A; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the second predetermined effect in the third layer from the top (Z value = 2). (Continued) (step S1732B). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the second predetermined effect as a use pattern, and performs display control of a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. In addition to transmitting to the VDP or the like of the unit 123 and transmitting the Z value (Z value = 2), the predetermined effect image corresponding to the second predetermined effect is transmitted from the upper third layer (Z value = 2). To display. Then, the first predetermined effect process is terminated. When the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set (step S1732A; NO), the process proceeds to step S1741.

  If the first predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S1731 (step S1731; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the first predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the first predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S1734), and it is determined whether or not the value of the predetermined effect timer is 0 (step S1735A). When the value of the predetermined effect timer is not 0 (step S1735A; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes operation control of the first predetermined effect in the third layer (Z value = 2) from the top ( (Step S1735B). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the first predetermined effect as a use pattern, and performs display control of a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The predetermined effect image corresponding to the first predetermined effect is transmitted from the uppermost layer (Z value = 2) by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 2) and the like to the VDP of the unit 123 and the like. To display. Then, the first predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S1735A; YES), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S1736), the first predetermined effect execution flag is reset (step S1737), and the first predetermined effect is set. The production process ends.

  In step S1741, the CPU 120 for effect control has set a next variation flag (a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect during the variation of the decorative pattern to be started next). Determine whether. If the next fluctuation flag is set (step S1741; YES), the process proceeds to step S1761.

  When the next variation flag is not set (step S1741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 measures the non-variable period measurement timer (timer for measuring the period during which the decorative symbol variation (variable display) is not started). ) Is determined to be 0 (step S 1742). When the non-change period measuring timer is operating, the value of the non-change period measuring timer is not zero. When the value of the non-change period measuring timer is 0 (step S1742; YES), that is, when the non-change period measuring timer is not operating, the process proceeds to step S1751.

  When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0 (step S 1742; NO), that is, when the non-change period measurement timer is operating, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decoration symbol change has started. Is determined (step S1743). Whether or not the decoration pattern change has started is determined, for example, based on the value of the effect control process flag. When the decoration pattern change is started (step S1743; YES), the process proceeds to step S1771.

  When the variation of the decorative symbol has not started (step S1743; NO), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the non-change period measuring timer by 1 (step S1744), and the value of the non-change period measurement timer. It is determined whether or not has become 0 (step S1745). When the value of the non-change period measurement timer becomes 0 (step S1745; YES), the process proceeds to step S1771. When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0 (step S1745; NO), the first predetermined effect process is terminated.

  In step S1751, the effect control CPU 120 receives a normal symbol variation start designation command indicating that a normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start designation (losing) command) has been received. It is determined whether or not a flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or ordinary symbol variation start designation (losing) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set (step S1751; NO), the first predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S1751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state based on the time-short flag. (Step S1752). If the current gaming state is the high base state (step S1752; YES), the first predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When the current gaming state is not the high base state (step S1752; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (step S1753). When it is not the big hit game state (step S1753; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the decorative symbol is changing (step S1755). When the decorative symbol is not changing (step S1755; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one minute or more has elapsed since the change of the decorative symbol is completed (step S1757). When 1 minute or more has passed (step S1757; YES), the first predetermined effect process is terminated. If one minute or more has not elapsed (step S1757; NO), the process proceeds to step S1759.

  Note that the end of the processing when one or more minutes have passed since the change of the decorative design has been taken into consideration that the player continues playing the game for a while after the change of the decorative design is completed. Because. In addition, the above 1 minute is slightly longer than the time (12 seconds × 4) based on the normal symbol variation time (12 seconds) in the low base state and the upper limit value 4 of the number of gate passing memories (ordinary symbol holding number). This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S1759 until the time (60 seconds) elapses.

  If the decorative design is changing (step S1755; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined time (eg, 11.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change (step S1758). If the predetermined time has elapsed (step S1758; YES), the first predetermined effect process is terminated. For example, in this embodiment, a description will be given assuming that a reach effect such as a super reach effect starts 11.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, in step S1758, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the super reach effect is being performed. If the super reach effect is being performed, the process is terminated.

  When the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S1758; NO), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the first predetermined effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed (step S1759). Then, control goes to a step S1764. Note that the elapsed time from the start of change is determined by, for example, the value of the change time timer.

  In step S1759, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect by the same method as the predetermined effect process of FIG. 40 (the process of step S759). Further, when executing the processing of step S1759, the effect control CPU 120 receives a normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or a normal symbol variation start designation (lost) command reception flag). ) Is reset. The effect control CPU 120 also sets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag that is set even when the process does not proceed to the process of step S1759 because it determines “YES” in steps S1752, S1753, S1755, and S1758. To reset.

  In step S1761, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not decoration pattern variation has started. Whether or not the decoration pattern change has started is determined, for example, based on the value of the effect control process flag. If the decorative symbol variation has not started (step S1761; NO), the value of the effect shortening timer (a timer for determining the degree of shortening the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S1762). When the decoration pattern change is started (step S1761; YES), the process proceeds to step S1771.

  In step S1764, CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect by the process in step S1759. If it is not decided to execute the first predetermined effect (step S1764; NO), the first predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect (step S1764; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decorative symbol is changing (step S1765). Whether or not the decorative design is changing is determined by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. If the decorative design is not changing (step S1765; NO), the process proceeds to step S1770. If the decorative design is changing (step S1765; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change pattern is non-reach (losing) (step S1766). If the variation pattern is not non-reach (losing) (step S1766; NO), the process proceeds to step S1771.

  When the variation pattern is non-reach (losing) (step S1766; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the remaining time of variation of the decorative symbol (for example, specified by the value of the variation time timer) is a normal symbol. It is determined whether it is shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 25 seconds: equivalent to a period until the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter) (step S1767). If not shorter (step S1767; NO), the process proceeds to step S1771. The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the remaining time of variation of the decorative symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  When the remaining time of the decoration symbol variation is short (step S1767; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory (at least the value of the first hold memory number counter and the value of the second hold memory number counter). It is determined whether any of them is not 0 (step S1768). If there is no pending storage (step S1768; NO), the process proceeds to step S1771.

  When there is an on-hold storage (step S1768; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a next fluctuation flag (step S1769).

  In step S1770, effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in the non-change period measurement timer.

  In step S1771, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next variation flag is set. If the next fluctuation flag is set (step S1771; YES), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect timer is selected (step S1772A). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect is the effect period. The shortened period is, for example, a result notification effect period. Subsequent to step S1772A, the effect control CPU 120 resets the next fluctuation flag (step S1772B).

  If the next variation flag is not set (step S1771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the non-change period measurement timer is 0 (step S1773). When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0 (step S1773; NO), the effect control CPU 120 selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-change period measurement timer (step S1774). ). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the non-change period measurement timer from the period of the predetermined effect is the effect period. The shortened period is, for example, a result notification effect period.

  When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is 0 (the non-change period measurement timer has timed out) (step S1773; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the decorative design is changing. (Step S1775). If the decorative design is changing (step S1775; YES), the effect control CPU 120 selects a predetermined effect pattern (step S1776). When the decorative design is not changing, the effect control CPU 120 selects a predetermined effect pattern (step S1777).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the first predetermined effect timer (step S1778). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first predetermined effect (step S1779) and sets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S1780).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the second predetermined effect process (step S182) in the predetermined effect process (step S180) shown in FIG. The second predetermined effect process is executed after the first predetermined effect process (step S181).

  In the second predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a new variation category command has been received (step S801). When a new variation category command is received (step S801; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S802). When a new variation category command has not been received (step S801; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second predetermined effect process.

  When the first predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S802; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set (step S802; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S803). When the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S803; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second predetermined effect determination flag indicating that execution of the second predetermined effect is determined. It is determined whether or not (step S804).

  When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set (step S804; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second predetermined effect process. When the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set (step S804; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next variation flag is set (step S805). When the next variation flag is set (step S805; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second predetermined effect process. If the next fluctuation flag is not set (step S805; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the non-change period measurement timer is operating (not 0) (step S806).

  When the non-change period measurement timer is operating (step S806; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second predetermined effect process. When the non-change period measurement timer is not operating (step S806; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state data has a value indicating the high base state (step S807). If the value indicates the high base state (step S807; YES), the second predetermined effect process is terminated. If the value is not a value indicating the high base state (step S807; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (step S808). Whether the game state is a big hit game state may be determined, for example, based on the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state (step S808; YES), the second predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is not the big hit gaming state (step S808; YES), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the variation pattern type indicated by the newly received variation category command is super reach (losing) or super reach (big hit). (Step S809).

  If it is not super reach (losing) or super reach (big hit) (step S809; NO), the second predetermined effect process is terminated.

  In the case of super reach (losing) or super reach (big hit) (step S809; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect for determining the effect mode to be executed. As the execution presence / absence determination table, a predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table is selected according to the winning determination result (super reach (losing) or super reach (big hit)) and the total number of pending storage (step S810). Subsequent to the process of step S810, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the second predetermined effect execution presence / absence determination table selected in the process of step S810 to determine whether or not to execute the second predetermined effect and the effect mode for execution. (Step S811). Subsequent to the process of step S811, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not it is determined to execute the second predetermined effect by the process of step S811 (step S812). If it is not decided to execute the second predetermined effect (step S812; NO), the second predetermined effect process is terminated.

  When it is determined to execute the second predetermined effect (step S812; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (step S813). When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also stored in the RAM. Further, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the notification is performed by setting a value that specifies the notification result to the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag. The result may be specified.

  Subsequent to step S813, the effect control CPU 120 sets the total number of pending storages in the first variation number counter (step S814). Note that the first variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays executed until the variation display including the second predetermined effect is started.

  In the predetermined effect process of FIG. 52, when execution of the second predetermined effect is determined during the decorative symbol variation display, and the first variation counter is set in step S814, the variation during the execution is first performed. When the display ends, the value of the first variation counter is decremented by 1. As a result, the value of the first variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect. In step S814, when the decorative symbol variation display is not in progress, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 120 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total pending storage number in the first variation number counter. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure that the value of the first variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect.

  Note that the second predetermined effect process may be executed in the variable display effect process in step S171 of FIG. 23 described later, instead of being executed as the predetermined effect process in step S180. That is, the second predetermined effect may be executed not as a pre-reading notice but as a notice effect in the change.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the display area of the image display device 5. In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 57 (A), a decorative design being variably displayed, a hold display image including the active display image G7, a roulette stand image G16, and an image G17 of a predetermined effect design. And a predetermined effect image including these are displayed.

  FIG. 57 (B) is continued from FIG. 57 (A) when it is determined that the first predetermined effect is executed in step S1759 of the first predetermined effect process, and the operation control of the first predetermined effect is executed in step S1735B. Represents a scene. In FIG. 57 (B), “◯” indicating that the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is controlled to be in the expanded and open state is displayed as a notice regarding the normal symbol (result notification effect).

  FIG. 57 (C) is continued from FIG. 57 (A) in the case where the second predetermined effect is determined to be executed in step S811 of the second predetermined effect process, and the operation control of the second predetermined effect is executed in step S1732B. Represents a scene. In FIG. 57 (C), “Intense heat” indicating that the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state is high is displayed as a notice regarding the decorative design (result notification effect).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the notice regarding the normal symbol and the notice regarding the decorative symbol are performed from a common mode (FIG. 57A). Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether it is a notice regarding a normal symbol or a notice regarding a decorative symbol.

  26 and 27, the error notification image, the decorative design, the predetermined effect image, the effect execution notification image, the accessory effect effect image, the hold display image, the group notice effect image, the chance zone effect image, the step up Although the Z value of each image of the notice effect image has been described, the Z values of images other than the above will be described below.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 58 (A) shows a cumulative prize ball number notification image (one example) for notifying the cumulative prize ball number. The cumulative prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 58 (A) includes a pictogram image G18 for notifying that a predetermined cumulative prize ball number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.) has been reached. In addition, the pictogram image G18 of FIG. 58 (A) notifies that 5000 pieces have been reached. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative prize ball number) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification image may be varied according to the cumulative prize ball number to be notified.

  FIG. 58B shows an award ball number notification image (one example) for notifying the number of winning balls for each jackpot. The prize ball number notification image shown in FIG. 58B includes a pictogram image G19 for notifying that a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 1000, 2000, etc.) has been reached. In addition, the pictogram image G19 of FIG. 58 (B) notifies that it reached 2000 pieces. The display time of the winning ball number notification image (the notification time of the cumulative number of winning balls) may be, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or until the end of the round. Depending on the number of prize balls to be notified, the display time of the prize ball number notification image may be varied.

  FIG. 58 (C) shows an opening effect image (one example) displayed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. The effect image during opening shown in FIG. 58 (C) includes an image G20 that informs how many rounds the current round is, and a frame image G21 that executes the effect during opening. In FIG. 58C, a character or the like is displayed in the frame image G21 as an effect during opening, but this is not shown.

  FIG. 58D shows Z values set for the images shown in FIGS. 26A and 58A to 58C. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 58 (D), the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. An error notification image (see FIG. 26A) is displayed in front of the winning ball number notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, instead of FIG. 58 (D), a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (E), or a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (F). Alternatively, a Z value may be set for each image as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing various image layers. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (D), an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. 59 (A). The prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one of the prize ball number notification images. An opening effect image having a Z value “3” displayed on the back layer is displayed on one back layer of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. In addition, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (D), when the error notification, the notification of the number of winning balls, the notification of the cumulative number of winning balls, and the execution period of the opening effect overlap, Each image is displayed in the display area of the display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing various image layers. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (G), as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the cumulative award ball number notification image having the Z value “0” is the frontmost image. The prize ball number notification image having the Z value “1” displayed on the layer is displayed on one layer behind the cumulative prize ball number notification image, and the error notification image having the Z value “2” is the prize ball number notification image. The open effect image having the Z value “3” is displayed on one back layer of the error notification image. In addition, when the Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 58 (G), when the cumulative prize ball number notification, prize ball number notification, error notification, and the performance period of the opening effect overlap, In the display area of the display device 5, for example, each image is displayed as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 61A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the mid-round processing (step S175). In the description of FIG. 61A, it is assumed that a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. Note that the flowchart of FIG. 61B will be described later.

  In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 61A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a notification command after opening the big prize opening is received (step S571).

  When it is determined that the notification command after the big prize opening is not received (step S571; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control of the effect during the opening in the fourth layer (Z value = 3) from the top. (Start, continue) (step S572). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control includes display control included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening set as the use pattern in the big hit start process (see FIG. 35) or the post-round process (see FIG. 35). A display control command specified by the data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a Z value (Z value = 3) is transmitted, for example. (See (C)) is displayed in the fourth layer (Z value = 3) from the top.

  After executing the process of step S572, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number notification operation control process (step S573). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls every time it receives a big prize opening notification command in the current big hit gaming state, and the number of prize balls after the addition is a predetermined number (for example, 1000, When reaching 2000, etc., the award ball number notification operation control is executed (started and continued) in the second highest layer (Z value = 1) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the award ball number notification as a use pattern, and performs display control of a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The prize ball number notification image (see FIG. 58 (B)) corresponding to the prize ball number notification is transmitted from the top by transmitting to the VDP of the unit 123 and transmitting the Z value (Z value = 1). Displayed in the second layer (Z value = 1).

  After executing the process of step S573, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control process (step S574). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 accumulates each time it receives a big prize winning notification command in a continuous big hit gaming state (a big hit gaming state that is continuously shifted without performing variable display in the normal state). When the number of prize balls is added, and the cumulative number of prize balls after the addition reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, 5000, 10000, etc.), the third layer from the top for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) At (Z value = 2), the operation control of the cumulative prize ball number notification is executed (started and continued). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification as a use pattern, and displays a display control command specified by display control data included in the set effect control pattern. The cumulative prize ball number notification image corresponding to the cumulative prize ball number notification by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 2) and the like to the VDP or the like of the control unit 123 (see FIG. 58A). Are displayed in the third layer from the top (Z value = 2). Then, the process during the round ends. Whether or not the normal state is reached after the end of the big hit gaming state (whether or not the transition to the low probability low base state) is received, the gaming state designation command (designation to transition to the low probability low base state) is received It may be determined by determining whether or not the number of times of ST (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are managed (counted) on the side of the production control board 12 as in the case of the main board 11 side.

  When it is determined that the notification command after opening the big prize opening is received (step S571; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect during closing (step S576), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the post-round processing. The value is updated to “6” (step S577), and the round is ended.

  In the above description, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. However, the condition for determining the jackpot type is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of or inside the big prize opening, and the type of jackpot is determined based on the game ball entering (passing) into the specific area. Good. Specifically, for example, in the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation jackpot may be determined based on a game ball entering a specific area. In addition, when the probability variation big hit is confirmed based on the game ball entering the specific area, the confirmation of the probability variation big hit may be notified (probability variation confirmation notification).

  FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of other images. FIG. 62 (A) shows a probability variation confirmation notification image (one example) for notifying the probability variation big hit confirmation. The probability change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. 62 (A) includes a character image G22 for notification of the word “probability change!”.

  FIG. 62B shows the Z values set in the probability change confirmation notification images shown in FIGS. 26A, 58A to 58C, and 62A. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 62 (B), the cumulative prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the opening effect image, and the prize ball number notification image is displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number notification image. The probability change confirmation notification image is displayed in front of the winning ball number notification image, and the error notification image is displayed in front of the probability change confirmation notification image. Note that the Z value of each image is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, instead of FIG. 62 (B), a Z value may be set for each image as shown in any of FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (G).

  FIG. 63 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. When a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 62 (B), an error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer as shown in FIG. 63 (A). The probability change confirmation notification image having the Z value “1” is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the winning ball number notification image having the Z value “2” is one layer behind the probability change determination notification image. The cumulative prize ball number notification image having the Z value “3” is displayed on one layer behind the prize ball number notification image, and the opening effect image having the Z value “4” is notified of the cumulative prize ball number. Displayed on the layer behind one of the images. In addition, when a Z value is set for each image as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the execution period of the error notification, the probability change confirmation notification image, the prize ball number notification, the cumulative prize ball number notification, and the opening effect is set. When overlapping, each image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

  FIG. 61 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of processing during round (step S175) in a mode in which a probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when a probability variation big hit is confirmed based on a game ball entering a specific area. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 61B, the same step number is assigned to the same process as that in FIG. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61 (B), in the aspect in which the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cumulative prize ball number notification operation control processing (step S574). After that, the probability change confirmation notification operation control process is executed (step S575). In other words, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a probability change confirmation notification command probability change confirmation notification command transmitted from the main board 11 when a game medium passes through a specific area, it performs a predetermined layer (for example, 5 seconds) for a predetermined layer. (For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), when a Z value is set for each image, operation control of the probability change confirmation notification is executed (start, continue) in the second highest layer (Z value = 1). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the probability change confirmation notification as a use pattern, and displays the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern. A probability change notification image corresponding to the probability change notification is transmitted by transmitting the Z value (Z value = 1) and the like to the VDP of the control unit 123 and the like (FIG. Is displayed at 2 second layer of (A) refer) from the upper (Z value = 1).

  In the above description, there is one kind of effect effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, but an effect effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17. May be two or more. Further, when there are two types of the effect effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for the two types of effect effect effect images. Different Z values may be set. Further, when there are three or more types of effect effect effect images displayed corresponding to the operation of the movable accessory 17, the same Z value may be set for all the effect effect effect images, A Z value different from that of other effect effect effect images may be set for one type of effect effect effect image.

  Further, in the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes one movable body (movable accessory 17), but may include two or more movable bodies. In an aspect including two or more movable bodies, each accessory effect effect image displayed corresponding to the operation of each movable body may be prepared. Further, the same Z value may be set for each of the above-mentioned accessory effect effect images, or different Z values may be set. For example, when there are two types of effect effect effect images (for example, an effect effect effect image a corresponding to the operation of the movable body A and an effect effect effect image b corresponding to the operation of the movable body B), the 2 The same Z value may be set for the types of effect effect effects images a and b, or different Z values may be set for the two types of effect effect effects images a and b. Also, three types of effect effects effect images (for example, an effect effect effect image c corresponding to the operation of the movable body C, an effect effect effect image d corresponding to the operation of the movable body D, and an operation of the movable body E are supported. If there is an effect effect image e) to be performed, the same Z value may be set for all three types, different Z values may be set for all three types, or the same for both types A Z value (for example, 4) may be set, and a different Z value (for example, 6) may be set for one other type. The same applies when there are four or more types of effect effect effect images. In addition, when there are a plurality of accessory effect effect images set with the same Z value in an aspect including two or more movable bodies, the display areas of the respective accessory effect effect images set with the same Z value overlap. It may not be necessary. In other words, the same Z value may be set for the effect effect effect image whose display areas do not overlap.

  In the above description, an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step S9063), but variable. In the display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of SU5 may be set. Specifically, when it is determined in step S530A to execute step-up notice effect (SU5) in the step-up notice effect determination process, the effect control pattern corresponding to SU5 is set in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532. May be set as a usage pattern, and an effect control pattern corresponding to execution notification of SU5 may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9067). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to execution notification of the group notice effect may be set. Specifically, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect in the group notice effect determining process in step S530B, the effect control pattern corresponding to the group notice effect is used in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532. And an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the group notice effect may be set.

  In the above description, the effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect is set in the effect execution notification operation control process (step S547) in the variable display effect process (step S172) (S9071). In the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the accessory effect may be set. Specifically, in the case of the super reach β variation pattern, in the process of setting the effect control pattern in step S532, the effect control pattern corresponding to the super reach β variation pattern is set as a usage pattern. An effect control pattern corresponding to the execution notification of the object effect may be set.

  In the above description, as shown in FIG. 25, in the case where the number of notifications is 3, the Z value of the pictogram image G3-1 that notifies the first effect in the notification start order is “5”, and the number of notifications is 2 or more. The Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 that reports the second effect in the notification start order is "4", and the Z value of the pictogram image G3-3 that reports the third effect in the notification start order when the notification number is 1 or more. The pictogram image G3-1 has a Z value of “3”, the pictogram image G3-2 has a Z value of “4”, and the pictogram image G3-3 has a Z value of “5”. Also good. That is, when displaying a plurality of effect execution notification images, a new one may be displayed at a lower level (back side) instead of a new one at a higher level (front side).

  In the above description, the setting range of the Z value is 0 to 11 (or 0 to 12), but the setting range of the Z value is not limited to the above. Also, the Z value is not necessarily an integer.

  In the above description, the Z value of the step-up notice effect image is constant (Z value = 10) regardless of the number of steps (SU1 to SU5) (FIG. 25), but the Z value is varied according to the number of steps. May be. For example, the Z value of SU1 to SU3 may be 10, and the Z value of SU4 and SU5 may be 9.5. In the above description, the display size of the step-up notice effect image is large (FIG. 25), but the display size may be varied depending on the number of steps. For example, the display sizes of SU1 to SU3 may be small, and the display sizes of SU4 and SU5 may be large.

  In addition, the chance zone effect may have a plurality of chance zones (low expectation zone, medium expectation zone, and high expectation zone) with different expectation levels, and if the Z value varies depending on the expectation level. It may be allowed. There may be a case where a transition is made from a low expectation zone to a medium expectation zone (or a high expectation zone), or a transition from a medium expectation zone to a high expectation zone. You may make it change Z value, when shifting to the chance zone of another expectation degree.

  Note that FIG. 30B shows a scene in which various images such as effects and notifications are displayed at the same time, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may have images that are not displayed at the same time. For example, it is not necessary to display all nine types of images shown in FIG. Further, the four types of images shown in FIGS. 58D to 58G may not be displayed at the same time. Further, the five types of images shown in FIGS. 62B to 62G may not be displayed at the same time. Note that not displaying at the same time does not execute some effects, notifications, and the like, so if the images such as some effects or notifications cannot be displayed at the same time, execute effects, notifications, etc. The case where it cannot display simultaneously is included because the timing is different.

  In addition, although all the images shown in FIG. 25A have different Z values, at least some of the images may have the same Z value. The same applies to the images in FIGS. When images with the same Z value are displayed, they may not overlap each other. For example, when the image A having a certain Z value is displayed, the image B having the same Z value as the image A may not be displayed. Further, the display start timing of the image B may be delayed until the display end timing of the image A. Further, when displaying the image B, the image A may be hidden (that is, the display end timing of the image A may be advanced). Further, for example, by changing the display position and display size of the image B (or by changing the display position and display size of the image A, or by changing the display position and display size of the image A and image B) Therefore, the image A and the image B may not be overlapped.

  In the above description, an example in which an error notification image is displayed when a magnetic abnormality occurs is described (see FIG. 34), but other errors (for example, an error based on opening of a glass door, an error based on detection of vibration) are described. An error notification image may be displayed when an error or the like based on the lower plate full is reached. The Z value may be varied depending on the type of error. For example, the error Z value based on the lower plate full may be a value between 3 and 4 (for example, 3.5), and the other error Z values may be 0.

  Further, although the Z value of the decorative symbol is described in FIG. 25B, the Z value of the symbol (always small symbol) displayed on the image display device 5 separately from the decorative symbol is a value between 0 and 1. (E.g., 0.5) or the highest priority (Z value = 0). Note that the small symbol does not necessarily represent the reach state (the state that all three symbols are displayed in a variable display, or the state that all three symbols are in a stopped display) It may be expressed in either of the states).

  In the above description, the Z value of the first effect execution notification image is 5, the Z value of the second effect execution notification image is 4, and the Z value of the third effect execution notification image is 3. The first Z value may be 3, and when the second is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 3 to 4 and the second Z value may be 3. Further, when the third is displayed, the first Z value may be changed from 4 to 5, the second Z value may be changed from 3 to 4, and the third Z value may be set to 3.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, there are a plurality of display timings of the plurality of effect execution notification images, and the display order of the notification target effects is not constant. For example, in FIG. 49, the notification target effect (group notice) is displayed first, and in FIG. 50, the notification target effect (SU5) is displayed first. Although not shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the notification target effect (instant) may be displayed first.

  In the above description, the notification target effect of the effect execution notification is the step-up notice effect Step 5 (SU5), the group notice effect, and the accessory effect, but other effects (for example, the title notice effect and the next notice effect). , A mini character notice effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) may be used as the notification target effect of the effect execution notification. Further, the notification target effect may be one type, two types, or four or more types. You may display the mission completion display using a portable terminal (a mobile phone, a smart phone, etc.) etc. as an effect of an effect notification.

  Further, the images such as effects and notifications are not limited to those shown in FIG. 25 and the like, for example, demo images, menu images, music selection images, music display images, right-handed notification images, left-handed back notification images, etc. Also, the Z value may be set respectively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display is set to 11, but if the value is larger than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image (that is, during variable display) If the predetermined effect image is displayed on the front of the decorative symbol), the Z value of the decorative symbol being variably displayed may not be 11.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 25, the Z value of the decorative design during stop display (after 2 seconds has elapsed from the stop display) is 11, but is larger than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image. If it is a value (that is, if a predetermined effect image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol during stop display (after 2 seconds have elapsed from the stop display)), stop display (2 from stop display) The Z value of the decorative pattern after the second has elapsed may not be 11. Further, the Z value of the decorative design during variable display and the Z value of the decorative design during stop display (after 2 seconds have elapsed from the stop display) may not be the same value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the Z value of the decorative design during the stop display (2 seconds from the stop display) is set to 1, but it is a value smaller than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image. (That is, if the predetermined effect image is displayed on the back of the decorative design during stop display (2 seconds from the stop display), the Z value of the decorative design during variable display may not be 1. .

  In the above description, the Z value of the decorative symbol is switched from 11 to 1 at the timing when the decorative symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (steps S722 and S724), but the Z value of the decorative symbol is changed from 11 to 1. The timing to switch to may not be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, it may be the timing immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the moment when the decorative symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed on the front of another image. Note that “immediately before” may be about 0.5 second to 2 seconds of stop display. It should be noted that by lowering the priority order of other images, the player may be able to visually recognize the moment when the decorative symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed in front of the other images.

  Further, in the above description, the Z value of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed is switched from 1 to 11 at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the stop display for the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed (steps S724 and S726). The timing at which the Z value of the decorative design is switched from 1 to 11 may not be the timing at which 2 seconds have elapsed since the stop display. For example, it may be a timing when 1 second elapses from the stop display, or may be a timing when 3 seconds elapses from the stop display.

  In the above description, the priority order of the predetermined effect image and the decorative design (which is displayed in front) and the Z value of the decorative design are changed, but the Z value of the predetermined effect image is changed. You may implement | achieve by making it change, and you may implement | achieve by changing both the Z value of a decoration design and the Z value of a predetermined effect image. In addition, the priority order between the predetermined effect image and the decorative design is not limited to the priority order between other images (for example, the priority order between the predetermined effect image and the chance zone effect image, the decorative design and the effect effect) The same applies to the priority order between the effect images and the priority order between the chance zone effect image and the accessory effect effect image.

  Further, in the above description, the Z value of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed is switched from 1 to 11 at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the stop display for the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed (steps S724 and S726). During the stop display, the Z value of the decorative symbol does not have to be switched. For example, the Z value during stop display is always constant (for example, Z value = 1), and when the next variable display is started (when a variation pattern designation command or the like is received), the Z value during stop display ( It may be switched from Z value = 1) to Z value during variable display (Z value = 11).

  In the above description, the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display are the same, but the Z value of the hold display and the Z value of the active display may be different. For example, Z value of active display <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of hold display) may be set. As an example, Z value of active display <Z value of super reach image <Z value of hold display (priority of active display> priority of super reach image> priority of hold display). Thereby, for example, during super reach, the hold display may not be visible, but the active display can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the Z value of a small design (production small design) displayed in a reduced form of the decorative design during super reach may be the same Z value as the active display, or the Z value between the active display and the super reach image. It may be a value.

  In the above description, the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed when the probability variation big hit is confirmed based on the game ball having entered the specific area in the jackpot gaming state, but the probability variation confirmation notification image is displayed as an image of the probability variation promotion effect. You may make it do. Further, instead of or in addition to the probability change confirmation notification image, another image (for example, an image of a round number promotion effect, an image for notification of a gaming state) may be displayed. In addition, the image for informing about the gaming state includes, for example, an image for informing that the game is in an advantageous state (for example, an image for informing that the base is high, in addition to a probability variation confirmation notification image, a specific variation pattern table (for example In addition, an image or the like for notifying that a variation pattern of a variation time shortened as time-shortening control is selected or is easily referred to is included.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment performs variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.) and is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a high base state, a high probability state) Etc.), which includes an effect execution means for executing an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 26, 27, 58, 62, etc.). The effect execution means is a predetermined effect image as an effect for notifying that the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B) is controlled to a state where the game medium is easy to win (for example, an expanded open state). (For example, a predetermined effect executed in the predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 40 or a predetermined effect process shown in FIG. 52) using a predetermined effect (for example, the predetermined effect image in FIG. 26C). The predetermined display image is set to have a higher priority of image display than the identification information in a predetermined period during variable display of the identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 31A). As shown in the figure, during the variable display of the decorative design, the predetermined effect image is displayed in a higher layer than the decorative design), and at least the priority of the image display in comparison with the identification information in the specific period during the stop display of the identification information Is set low (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B)), while a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (two seconds after the stop display), a predetermined effect image is displayed on a lower layer than the decorative symbol. )

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment includes a game control means (for example, control by the CPU 103 of the main board 11) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, the effect control board 12 of the effect control board 12). Control by the CPU 120 for effect control), and the effect control means performs variable display means for performing variable display of identification information at least with the effect execution means (for example, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process). Including a process of setting a control pattern as a use pattern (step S532), a process of variably displaying decorative symbols based on the effect control pattern set in the variable display effect process (step S542), and the like. The means is a stop command (for example, specifying stop display of the identification information) to the effect control means. The variable display means stops displaying the identification information being variably displayed based on the fact that the presentation control means has received the stop command (for example, in the waiting process per special figure). The decorative design is stopped and displayed (step S724, etc.), and the priority order of the image display of the predetermined effect image and the priority order of the identification information are switched based on the fact that the effect control means has received the stop command (for example, As shown in step S722, the Z value of the decorative symbol during variable display is set to a Z value (Z value = 11) larger than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image, and as shown in step S724, When the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the Z value of the decorative symbol being stopped and displayed is switched to a Z value (Z value = 1) smaller than the Z value (Z value = 2) of the predetermined effect image).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect image is identified in a period after a special period (for example, 2 seconds after the stop display) has elapsed since the identification information during variable display is stopped. The priority order is set lower than that of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (after 2 seconds have elapsed after the stop display), the predetermined effect image is displayed. It is displayed in a layer below the decorative pattern).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect image can be suitably displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment determines a determining means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, a process for determining a special figure display result in the special symbol normal process (step S240) and a jackpot type. Determination process (step S242) and the like, and determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before determination by the determination means (for example, the random number MR1 is a big hit in the winning random number determination process) A process for determining whether or not it is within the determination (step S406), a process for determining the jackpot type (step S407), etc., and the effect executing means is executed based on the determination by the determining means. First notice effect (step S544 in step S544) using a first effect image (for example, a step-up notice effect image or a group notice effect image) as the notice effect. 2) using a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image, etc.) as a notice effect executed based on the determination by the determination means. A notice effect (such as a chance zone effect) can be executed, and different priorities are set for the first effect image and the second effect image (for example, as shown in FIG. Z value “8” is set for the notice effect image, Z value “9” is set for the chance zone effect image, and Z value “10” is set for the step-up notice effect image). That is, the first effect image (group notice effect image or the like) has a higher priority for image display than the second effect image (chance zone effect or the like), and the second effect image (chance zone effect or the like). Etc.) may be set higher in image display priority than the first effect image (step-up notice effect image or the like).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect executing means is an interlocking image (for example, an effect effect effect image or the like) displayed in conjunction with an operation of a movable body (for example, the movable accessory 17). A non-interactive effect (for example, a group notice effect) using a linked effect (for example, an effect effect effect or the like) using a non-interactive image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) displayed without being interlocked with the operation of the movable body. Etc., and the linked image has a higher priority for image display than the non-linked image (for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the role of the Z value “6”) is set. The object effect effect image is displayed on the front side of the group notice effect image with the Z value “8”).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. In addition, although the interlocking image has been described as being displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body, the display start timing of the interlocking image and the operation start timing of the movable body do not necessarily coincide with each other. The display end timing and the operation end timing of the movable body do not necessarily match. In other words, an image having a display time that does not match the operation time of the movable body may be included in the interlocking image. For example, an image that is displayed before the start of the operation of the movable body and notifies the player that the movable body is operating, and an image that is displayed after the end of the operation of the movable body and gives the player the reverberation of the operation of the movable body are also linked images. included. In addition, the display content of the interlocking image may be display content that matches the shape or operation of the movable body (for example, the display content of the interlocking image shown in FIG. Although the combined circular effect image G4 is used, the display content of the interlocking image does not have to be the display content that matches the shape or operation of the movable body. In other words, an image having a display content that does not match the shape or operation of the movable body may be included in the interlocking image. For example, when the movable body is operated, if the image is related to the movement of the movable body (an image that predicts, complements, and emphasizes the movement of the movable body), the display content is irrelevant to the shape and movement of the movable body. Even images are included in linked images.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment stores a hold storage unit that stores variable display that has not yet started as hold information (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, A first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a second starting winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and a hold image (for example, a hold display image, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means A holding display means (for example, a process of adding a holding display in the winning effect determination process (steps S162 and S165), a process of digesting the holding display in the variable display start setting process (step S531), etc.) The effect executing means uses an interlocking effect using an interlocking image displayed in conjunction with the operation of a movable body (for example, the movable accessory 17). For example, an effect effect effect image or the like can be executed, and the linked image has a higher priority for image display than the reserved image (for example, as shown in FIG. 28, the Z value “ The 6 ”accessory effect effect image is displayed on the front side of the hold display image of the Z value“ 7 ”).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the effect executing means includes a first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect) in the first region (region of image size “small” as shown in FIG. 25A). The second effect image in the first effect (for example, the chance zone effect) using the image or the like and the second region (the region having the image size “large” as shown in FIG. 25A) wider than the first region. It is possible to execute a second effect (for example, a group notice effect, a step up notice effect image, etc.) using a group notice effect image, a step up notice effect image, etc., and a first effect image and a second effect image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a Z value “8” is set for the group notice effect image, and a Z value “9” is set for the chance zone effect image). Is set and The up announcement attraction image has been set Z value "10"). That is, when the second effect image (group notice effect image or the like) has a higher priority for image display than the first effect image (chance zone effect image or the like), the first effect image (chance zone or the like) In some cases, the image display priority is set higher than the second effect image (step-up notice effect image or the like).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. The first effect image and the second effect image are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, the images shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C) and FIG. 62 (A), other images (demo images, menu images, music selection images, right-handed notification images, left-handed back notification images, The promoted image, small design image, etc.) may be the first effect image (or the second effect image).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to provide notification means (for example, error notification processing in step S75) using notification images (for example, various notification images shown in FIGS. 26, 58, 62, etc.). The notification means can notify an error using an error notification image (for example, the error notification image shown in FIG. 26A), and the error notification image is an image compared with the effect image. The display priority is set higher (for example, as shown in FIG. 25B, the error notification image with the Z value “0” is, for example, the front side of the effect effect effect image with the Z value “6”. Displayed).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image can be suitably displayed without preventing error notification.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification means executes the specific effect when a specific effect (for example, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, an accessory effect, etc.) is executed. Can be notified using an information image (for example, an effect execution notification image, etc.), and the information image is set to have a high priority (for example, an effect execution as shown in FIG. 25B). Z values “3” to “5” higher than the Z value “6” of the accessory effect effect image are set in the notification image).

  According to such a structure, the visibility of an information image can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect executing means is a first interlocked image (for example, an effect effect effect image) that is displayed in conjunction with the operation of the first movable body (for example, the above-described movable body A). The first interlocking effect using a) and the second interlocking image (for example, the effect effect effect image b) displayed in conjunction with the operation of the second movable body (for example, the above-described movable body B) are used. The second interlocking effect can be executed, and the first interlocking image may have a different priority order than the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, the effect effect effect image a and the role Different Z values may be set for the object effect effect image b).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image according to the movable body can be suitably displayed with different priorities.

  The first interlocking image may be set to the same priority as the second interlocking image (for example, as described above, the same for the effect effect effect image a and the effect effect effect image b). Z value may be set).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed. For example, the effect image according to the movable body can be suitably displayed with the same priority.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification means uses the first value notification image (for example, a prize ball number notification image) to acquire the value (for example, the jackpot) obtained in a specific period (such as each jackpot gaming state). The number of prize balls, etc.) and the second value notification image (for example, cumulative prize ball number notification image, etc.) for a special period (for example, a success game state that has continuously shifted without entering a normal state) And the like (for example, the cumulative number of winning balls in the big hit), and different priorities are set for the first value notification image and the second value notification image. (For example, as shown in FIG. 58D, a Z value different from that of the cumulative prize ball number notification image is set in the prize ball number notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification means uses an error notification image to obtain an error and a value acquired using a value notification image (for example, a prize ball number notification image, a cumulative prize ball number notification image, etc.) , The number of prize balls, etc.) can be notified, and different priority levels are set for the error notification image and the value notification image (for example, as shown in FIG. Z values different from the prize ball number notification image and the cumulative prize ball number notification image are set).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the notification means uses the error notification image to indicate an error and a state notification image (for example, a probability change confirmation notification image shown in FIG. (For example, an image that indicates that the fluctuation pattern table is referred to) is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, or is controlled to a high base state after the big hit gaming state. And the error notification image and the status notification image may be set with different priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the error notification image). Is set to a Z value different from the probability change confirmation notification image).

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  The image display device 5 displays a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the small symbol image may be set higher in image display priority than the effect image. . For example, the image display priority may be set higher for the small symbol image compared to the error notification image (excluding an error notification image for notifying a serious error that causes a game stop).

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of a hold display is made into three colors, white, yellow, and red (refer FIG. 38), the display mode of a hold display is not limited to this. For example, the above three colors (white, yellow, red) may be other three colors (for example, three colors of white, blue, and red, and three colors of gray, light blue, and purple) different from at least one color. Two colors or four or more colors may be used. Moreover, patterns, shapes, and sizes may be different. The same applies to the active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. Further, there may be a display mode dedicated to active display that is not displayed as the hold display. Thereby, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the display mode of the hold display is changed at the time of a shift, you may change the display mode of a hold display at another timing instead of or in addition at the time of a shift. For example, you may make it change during the variable display of a decoration symbol. The same applies to the active display. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration. In addition, interest is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although determined with the display mode of a hold display, and the display mode of an active display simultaneously (by one determination), you may determine separately. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the display mode of the hold display in each display position is determined collectively at the time of winning a prize, However, You may make it determine the display mode of the hold display after a shift every time it shifts. In the above embodiment, the display mode of active display is determined at the time of winning a prize. However, the display mode of active display may be determined when displaying in the active display area AHA. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  In the above embodiment, the step-up notice effect and the group notice effect are exemplified as the main notice effect. May be. The same effect can be obtained by such a configuration.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the variation category determination table for the big hit (see FIGS. 20C and 20D) is common to the reserved storage numbers “0” to “4”. Similar to the table (see FIGS. 20A and 20B), etc., it may be divided by the number of reserved memories.

  In the above embodiment, when hold data (hold information) is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, it is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. The reservation data is preferentially digested (see FIG. 18), but the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151S and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are held in order of winning order. The data may be digested. For example, a sorting device may be provided so that the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are alternately awarded to digest the pending data in the order of winning.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to those having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10. (B), FIG. 39 (B), etc., A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 100% and 0% allocation)).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be three or more types. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that provides only a probable big hit as the big hit type is shown, but a gaming machine that includes a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) as the big hit type may be used.

  In the above embodiment, a mode has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−” are variably displayed and display results are derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed may be different from the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and among the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and a mode in which variable display is performed using only one type of special symbols may be used. As variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (turning on / off alternately may be repeated). That is, the repeated display of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed last (lit), or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be. The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, normal symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it is made to control to a big hit gaming state based on having displayed the big hit symbol on the 1st special symbol display 4A or the 2nd special symbol display 4B, it controls to a big hit gaming state. The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or in the second start prize opening, and the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the entry (passing) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous, etc., one change pattern designation command is used when starting change. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the change pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table) and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table and determines the random value determination process (determination of whether or not to become a big hit, determination of the variation category, and big hit. In the example, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned random number determination table is stored in the effect control board 12, and the random value itself is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command that can specify the random value from the main board 11). The effect control board 12 receives the random value itself extracted in the main board 11, and refers to the random value determination table based on the received random value. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number determination process, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to win the jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and also determines the random value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined with the main board | substrate 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

  In addition, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of the random numbers or changing the update range of the random numbers.

  In addition, for example, to a gaming machine that gives a game score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recorded information on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (for example, including structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determination values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be stored together in the ROM 101, but may be stored in a distributed (scattered) manner at a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. Alternatively, a mathematical expression or a program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random number value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table stored in the ROM 121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as the gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... accessory control board 17 ... movable accessory 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A ... first start port switch 22B ... second start port switch 23 ... count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display controller 126 ... RTC circuit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, variably displays identification information, and displays a display result by stopping display of the identification information,
Determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
A determination unit that determines whether the advantageous state is controlled before the determination unit determines;
Character information display means for displaying character information related to variable display;
Production execution means for performing production using the production image ;
With
The production execution means
A first notice effect that displays a first effect image on the first layer can be executed as a notice effect that is executed based on the determination by the determining means;
As a notice effect that is executed based on the determination by the determination means, a second notice effect that displays a second effect image on the second layer arranged on the front side of the first layer can be executed.
When executing the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first effect image is displayed on the first layer, and the second effect image is displayed on the second layer. The second effect image is displayed on the front side of the effect image,
During the variable display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the back side of the first layer,
During the stop display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the front side of the second layer,
The production execution means further includes
And in the variable display of the identification information, Ri executable der a predetermined effect using the displayed stop identification information, the predetermined effect image that can be displayed across,
In the predetermined period of the variable display in the identification information even without low, displays the identification information to the predetermined effect image than the layer that displays arranged on the rear side layer,
At least in a specific period during the stop display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the front side of the layer displaying the predetermined effect image.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and derives a display result by stopping display of identification information,
Character information display means for displaying character information related to variable display;
Production execution means for performing production using the production image ;
With
The production execution means
In conjunction with the movement of the movable body, it is possible to execute a linked effect that displays a linked image on the first layer,
Without interlocking with the operation of the movable body, it is possible to execute a non-linked effect that displays a non-linked image on the second layer disposed on the back side of the first layer,
When executing the linked effect and the unlinked effect, the linked image is displayed on the first layer and the unlinked image is displayed on the second layer, so that the non-linked image is displayed on the back side of the linked image. Display linked images,
During the variable display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the back side of the second layer,
During the stop display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the front side of the first layer,
The production execution means further includes
And in the variable display of the identification information, Ri executable der a predetermined effect using the displayed stop identification information, the predetermined effect image that can be displayed across,
In the predetermined period of the variable display in the identification information even without low, displays the identification information to the predetermined effect image than the layer that displays arranged on the rear side layer,
At least in a specific period during the stop display of the identification information, the identification information is displayed on the layer arranged on the front side of the layer displaying the predetermined effect image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images